1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
502 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
503 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
510 \begin_inset Note Note
513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
514 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
515 Code box prevent that the term
516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
524 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
525 More about \SpecialChar TeX
526 Code is described in section
531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
533 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
537 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
538 is explained in section
543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
545 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
555 \begin_inset Index idx
558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
559 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
565 See section 5.1 of the
569 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
573 \begin_layout Chapter
574 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
578 \begin_layout Section
579 Basic File Operations
580 \begin_inset Index idx
583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
592 \begin_layout Standard
597 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
598 in addition to some more advanced operations:
601 \begin_layout Itemize
623 \begin_layout Itemize
639 arg "buffer-new-template"
645 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \begin_layout Itemize
691 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \begin_layout Itemize
725 arg "buffer-write-as"
731 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \begin_layout Itemize
759 \begin_layout Standard
760 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
761 a few minor differences.
764 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
775 command lists the available templates.
776 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
777 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
778 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
786 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
793 \begin_layout Standard
794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
826 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
827 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
828 is just that — a big, blank space.
836 \begin_layout Standard
857 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
862 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
865 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
883 will reload the document from disk.
884 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
885 and want to restore it to the last save.
894 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
895 them as your changes.
898 \begin_layout Section
899 Basic Editing Features
900 \begin_inset Index idx
903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
912 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
919 \begin_layout Standard
920 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
921 can perform cut and paste operations
922 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
923 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
924 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
925 editing features and how to access
927 We will start with cut and paste.
930 \begin_layout Standard
931 As you might expect, the
935 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
936 various other editing features.
937 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
941 \begin_layout Itemize
947 \begin_inset Index idx
950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
979 \begin_layout Itemize
985 \begin_inset Index idx
988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1017 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset Index idx
1026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1051 \begin_layout Itemize
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_layout Itemize
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1071 \begin_layout Itemize
1075 \begin_inset space ~
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1085 \begin_inset Index idx
1088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 \begin_inset Index idx
1100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1115 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1125 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1131 \begin_layout Standard
1132 The first three are self-explanatory.
1133 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1134 and other programs by
1155 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1156 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1161 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1162 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1163 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1164 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1165 into individual cells.
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1174 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1175 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1179 \begin_layout Standard
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1188 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1190 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1192 \begin_inset space ~
1199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1205 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1206 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1207 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1213 \begin_inset space \space{}
1216 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1217 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1223 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1225 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1233 \begin_inset space ~
1242 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1243 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1245 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1254 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1255 start a new paragraph.
1256 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1257 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1282 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1285 paste from the primary selection.
1286 This is normally the currently selected text.
1289 \begin_layout Standard
1292 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1294 \begin_inset space ~
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1316 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1322 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 button to skip the current word.
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1348 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1352 \begin_inset space ~
1357 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1359 If the toggle is set, searching for
1360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1371 will not match the word
1372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1386 Match whole words only
1388 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1389 to only find complete words, e.
1390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1419 offers also an advanced
1422 \begin_inset space ~
1426 \begin_inset space ~
1431 feature that is described in sec.
1432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1438 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1445 \begin_layout Standard
1446 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1447 \begin_inset space \space{}
1451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1459 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1461 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1466 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1473 \begin_layout Standard
1477 arg "inset-select-all"
1480 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1481 When the cursor is inside an inset
1484 arg "inset-select-all"
1487 selects the content of the inset.
1491 arg "inset-select-all"
1494 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1499 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1502 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1506 \begin_layout Section
1508 \begin_inset Index idx
1511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1518 \begin_inset Index idx
1521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1530 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1537 \begin_layout Standard
1538 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1540 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1546 or the toolbar button
1552 to undo some mistake.
1553 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1555 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1558 or the toolbar button
1565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1572 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1580 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1589 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1590 This is a consequence of the 100
1591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1594 step undo limit mentioned above.
1597 \begin_layout Standard
1606 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1608 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1612 \begin_layout Section
1614 \begin_inset Index idx
1617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1630 \begin_layout Enumerate
1632 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1644 once anywhere in the edit window.
1645 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1649 \begin_layout Enumerate
1651 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1658 \begin_layout Itemize
1665 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1668 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1671 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1672 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1675 \begin_layout Itemize
1676 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1679 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1686 \begin_layout Enumerate
1687 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1688 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1696 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1697 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1701 \begin_layout Section
1703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1705 name "sec:Navigating"
1710 \begin_inset Index idx
1713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1722 \begin_layout Standard
1724 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1727 \begin_layout Itemize
1732 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1733 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1736 \begin_layout Itemize
1737 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1739 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1741 \begin_inset space ~
1746 or by the toolbar button
1749 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1755 \begin_layout Itemize
1756 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1758 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1761 and use the same menu to return to them.
1762 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1769 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1774 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1775 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1777 \begin_inset space ~
1782 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1783 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1784 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1785 your last editing position.
1788 \begin_layout Standard
1793 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1797 \begin_layout Subsection
1799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1801 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1808 \begin_layout Standard
1809 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1810 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1811 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1819 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1823 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1830 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1835 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1839 \begin_layout Standard
1840 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1841 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1842 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1843 dialog and to modify the citation.
1846 \begin_layout Standard
1847 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1849 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1850 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1858 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1861 \begin_layout Standard
1862 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1863 you further to control the display.
1868 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1869 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1875 option keeps it in the current view state.
1876 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1877 \begin_inset space ~
1880 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1881 \begin_inset space ~
1884 3, the subsections of sections
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1888 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1893 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1898 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1908 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1911 \begin_layout Standard
1918 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1919 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1933 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1934 So, for example, you can move section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1942 2.4 or after section
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1948 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1961 (or the corresponding key bindings
1969 ) you can change the level of sections.
1970 So you can for example make section
1971 \begin_inset space ~
1975 \begin_inset space ~
1979 \begin_inset space ~
1985 \begin_layout Section
1986 Input/Word Completion
1987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1989 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1994 \begin_inset Index idx
1997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2004 \begin_inset Index idx
2007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2040 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2042 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2043 is used to propose completions.
2046 \begin_layout Standard
2047 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2050 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2055 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2066 \begin_inset space ~
2071 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2075 \begin_inset space ~
2080 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2081 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2085 \begin_inset space ~
2091 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2092 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2093 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2094 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2097 \begin_layout Standard
2099 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2100 completions available.
2105 key to accept a proposed completion.
2106 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2107 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2108 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2115 \begin_layout Standard
2116 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2117 ing options for text.
2118 The special math option
2122 enables characters to be composed.
2123 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2124 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2127 , you can then input the characters
2128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2139 to a formula to get it.
2140 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2141 of the math toolbar.
2142 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2146 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2147 's installation folder.
2148 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2157 \begin_layout Section
2159 \begin_inset Index idx
2162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2169 \begin_inset Index idx
2172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2201 \begin_inset Index idx
2204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2235 \begin_layout Standard
2236 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2250 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2253 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2257 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2264 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2271 \begin_layout Standard
2275 \begin_inset space ~
2283 \begin_inset space ~
2304 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2308 \begin_layout Labeling
2309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2313 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2314 LatexCommand nomenclature
2316 description "Tabulator key"
2322 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2324 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2325 \begin_inset space ~
2329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2331 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2338 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2342 , especially section
2343 \begin_inset space ~
2347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2349 reference "subsec:Lists"
2355 If you are still confused, look in the
2360 \begin_inset Newline newline
2368 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2369 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2373 \begin_layout Labeling
2374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2378 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2379 LatexCommand nomenclature
2381 description "Escape key"
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2395 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2396 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2399 \begin_layout Labeling
2400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2406 \begin_inset space ~
2410 \begin_inset space ~
2417 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2418 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2422 \begin_layout Standard
2423 There are three modifier keys:
2426 \begin_layout Labeling
2427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "Control key"
2452 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2453 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2454 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2461 \begin_layout Itemize
2470 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2473 \begin_layout Itemize
2482 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2485 \begin_layout Itemize
2494 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2498 \begin_layout Labeling
2499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2518 LatexCommand nomenclature
2520 description "Shift key"
2524 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2525 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2528 \begin_layout Labeling
2529 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2547 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2548 LatexCommand nomenclature
2550 description "Alt or Meta key"
2554 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2555 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2556 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2562 \begin_inset Newline newline
2565 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2567 menu accelerator keys
2570 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2571 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2572 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2579 \begin_layout Standard
2580 For example, the sequence
2581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2587 \begin_inset space ~
2591 \begin_inset space ~
2597 \begin_inset space ~
2605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2624 \begin_inset space ~
2630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2640 \begin_layout Standard
2645 manual lists all other things bound to the
2653 \begin_layout Standard
2654 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2656 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2657 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2658 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2659 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2660 The \SpecialChar LyX
2661 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2662 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2663 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2665 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2681 followed by a capital
2688 \begin_layout Chapter
2691 \begin_inset Index idx
2694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2704 \begin_layout Section
2706 \begin_inset Index idx
2709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_layout Subsection
2722 \begin_layout Standard
2723 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2724 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2725 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2726 numbering schemes, and so on.
2727 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2728 and format the title of your document differently.
2731 \begin_layout Standard
2736 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2737 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2738 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2739 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2740 picks one for you by default.
2741 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2744 \begin_layout Subsection
2746 \begin_inset Index idx
2749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2758 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2765 \begin_layout Standard
2766 You can select a class using the
2768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2769 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2773 \begin_inset Index idx
2776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2783 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 Article for basic articles
2801 \begin_layout Description
2802 Report for basic reports
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Book for writing a book
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Letter for US-style letters
2813 \begin_layout Standard
2814 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2815 only uses if you have installed
2816 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2817 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2818 distributions will include
2820 Here are some of the classes.
2821 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2823 Special Document Classes
2832 \begin_layout Description
2833 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2836 \begin_layout Description
2837 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2848 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2849 There are three article layouts available.
2850 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2851 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2852 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2853 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2858 sequential numbering
2859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2862 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2863 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2864 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2865 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2868 \begin_layout Description
2869 Beamer Layout for presentations
2872 \begin_layout Description
2873 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2874 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2875 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2876 with \SpecialChar LyX
2880 \begin_layout Description
2881 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2884 \begin_layout Description
2886 \begin_inset space ~
2889 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2892 \begin_layout Description
2893 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2896 \begin_layout Description
2897 Foils Used to make transparencies
2900 \begin_layout Description
2901 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2902 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2903 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2904 with \SpecialChar LyX
2908 \begin_layout Description
2909 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2910 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2913 \begin_layout Description
2914 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2917 \begin_layout Description
2918 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2923 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2924 (Is used by this document.)
2927 \begin_layout Description
2928 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2931 \begin_layout Description
2932 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2935 \begin_layout Description
2940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2947 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2948 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2950 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2954 \begin_layout Description
2955 Slides Used to make transparencies
2958 \begin_layout Description
2960 \begin_inset space ~
2963 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2964 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2967 \begin_layout Description
2968 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2971 \begin_layout Standard
2972 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2974 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2980 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2981 of the document classes.
2984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2988 \begin_layout Standard
2989 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2992 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2994 \begin_inset Index idx
2997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3014 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3015 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3017 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3020 \begin_layout Standard
3023 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3028 , are highly specialized.
3030 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3031 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3032 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3033 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3034 by some document class.
3035 There are just too many of them.
3036 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3039 \begin_layout Standard
3040 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3048 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3049 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3050 document class for a new file.
3052 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3057 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3066 manual for information on how to install them.
3067 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3073 \begin_layout Standard
3074 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3075 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3076 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3077 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3078 class files to be used for dissertation
3079 s submitted to those universities.
3080 The \SpecialChar LyX
3081 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3083 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3087 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3093 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3100 name "subsec:Modules"
3105 \begin_inset Index idx
3108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 \begin_layout Standard
3118 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3119 chosen document class.
3120 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3121 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3132 \begin_inset Index idx
3135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3146 \begin_layout Standard
3147 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3148 packages or file format converters that are not always
3149 installed by default.
3151 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3152 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3153 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3154 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3156 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3157 file without the missing prerequisites.
3158 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3159 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3162 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3166 \begin_inset Index idx
3169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3170 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3189 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3192 \begin_layout Standard
3193 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3201 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3203 will advise you about these things.
3211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3215 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3220 \begin_inset Index idx
3223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3224 Document ! Local Layout
3232 \begin_layout Standard
3233 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3234 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3235 : They are intended to be used in
3236 a variety of different documents.
3237 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3238 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3239 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3240 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3241 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3243 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3261 manual for information on how to use it.
3264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3268 \begin_layout Standard
3269 Each class has a default set of options.
3270 Here's a quick table describing them:
3273 \begin_layout Standard
3274 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3280 \begin_layout Standard
3282 \begin_inset Tabular
3283 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3284 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3285 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3286 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3287 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3288 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3289 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3743 \begin_layout Standard
3744 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3750 \begin_layout Standard
3751 You're probably also wondering what
3752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3756 \begin_inset space ~
3760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3764 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3765 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3770 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3775 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3785 headings, there are also
3793 headings, and so on.
3794 We will describe these headings fully in section
3795 \begin_inset space ~
3799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3801 reference "subsec:Headings"
3808 \begin_layout Subsection
3810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3812 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3817 \begin_inset Index idx
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3827 \begin_inset Index idx
3830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3839 \begin_layout Standard
3840 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3849 \begin_inset space ~
3857 \begin_inset space ~
3862 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3864 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3865 doesn't support special options you want to
3866 use for your document.
3867 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3868 -class and its options, you have to read
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3876 \begin_inset space ~
3883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3889 \begin_inset space ~
3894 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3895 You can choose between the following five options:
3898 \begin_layout Labeling
3899 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3904 Use default page style of current class.
3907 \begin_layout Labeling
3908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3913 No page numbers or headings.
3916 \begin_layout Labeling
3917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3925 \begin_layout Labeling
3926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3931 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3932 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3933 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3934 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3937 \begin_layout Labeling
3938 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3943 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3944 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3955 -packages ! fancyhdr
3961 How they are defined is explained in section
3962 \begin_inset space ~
3966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3968 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3975 \begin_layout Standard
3976 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3977 \begin_inset space ~
3981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3983 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3990 \begin_layout Subsection
3991 Paper Size and Orientation
3992 \begin_inset Index idx
3995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3996 Document ! Paper size
4002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4004 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4011 \begin_layout Standard
4012 You can find the following options in the menu
4015 \begin_inset space ~
4022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4026 \begin_inset Index idx
4029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4043 \begin_inset space ~
4048 What size paper to print on.
4050 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
4057 \begin_layout Itemize
4063 \begin_layout Itemize
4069 \begin_layout Itemize
4075 \begin_layout Itemize
4081 \begin_layout Itemize
4084 US letter, US legal, US executive
4087 \begin_layout Itemize
4093 \begin_layout Itemize
4100 \begin_layout Labeling
4101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4106 To choose whether to output as
4117 \begin_layout Labeling
4118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4122 \begin_inset space ~
4127 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4128 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4131 \begin_layout Subsection
4133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4135 name "subsec:Margins"
4140 \begin_inset Index idx
4143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4150 \begin_inset Index idx
4153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 \begin_layout Standard
4163 Paper margins are set in the menu
4165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4169 \begin_inset Index idx
4172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4181 \begin_layout Standard
4182 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4183 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4184 the paper format and the font size into account.
4187 \begin_layout Subsection
4191 \begin_layout Standard
4192 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4198 That includes the paragraph environments.
4199 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4200 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4201 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4203 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4212 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4214 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4215 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4216 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4219 \begin_layout Section
4220 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4221 \begin_inset Index idx
4224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4225 Paragraph ! Indentation
4233 \begin_layout Subsection
4235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4237 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4244 \begin_layout Standard
4245 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4246 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4249 \begin_layout Standard
4250 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4251 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4252 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4253 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4257 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4263 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4264 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4265 language than English.
4267 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4270 \begin_layout Standard
4271 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4272 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4273 into \SpecialChar LyX
4275 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4278 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4280 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4281 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4282 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4289 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4290 goes to produce a printable file.
4295 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4297 gives you the ability globally to change
4301 these pre-coded spacings.
4302 We will explain more later.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4306 Paragraph Separation
4307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4309 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4314 \begin_inset Index idx
4317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4318 Paragraph ! Separation
4326 \begin_layout Standard
4334 \begin_inset space ~
4342 \begin_inset space ~
4349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4353 \begin_inset Index idx
4356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4365 \begin_layout Subsection
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4373 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4375 \begin_inset space ~
4380 dialog and toggle the
4383 \begin_inset space ~
4388 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4391 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4395 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4396 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4400 \begin_layout Standard
4401 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4402 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4405 \begin_layout Subsection
4407 \begin_inset Index idx
4410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4411 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4419 \begin_layout Standard
4422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4426 \begin_inset Index idx
4429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4442 \begin_inset space ~
4451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4452 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4458 \begin_inset Index idx
4461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4463 -packages ! setspace
4468 installed to use this feature.
4473 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4475 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4477 \begin_inset space ~
4482 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4483 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4486 \begin_layout Section
4487 Paragraph Environments
4488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4490 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4495 \begin_inset Index idx
4498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4499 Paragraph ! Environments
4505 \begin_inset Index idx
4508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4509 Paragraph environments|(
4517 \begin_layout Subsection
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4544 \begin_inset Newline newline
4547 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4549 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4550 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4551 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4560 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4563 \begin_layout Standard
4564 A paragraph environment is simply a
4565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4572 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4573 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4574 scheme, labels, and so on.
4575 Additionally, you can
4576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4583 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4584 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4585 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4586 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4588 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4590 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4593 \begin_layout Standard
4594 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4595 \begin_inset Graphics
4596 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4602 at the left end of the toolbar.
4604 will change the environment of the
4608 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4609 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4610 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4614 \begin_layout Standard
4623 create a new paragraph using the
4627 paragraph environment.
4629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4636 because if you are in one of these environments:
4639 \begin_layout Itemize
4645 \begin_layout Itemize
4651 \begin_layout Itemize
4657 \begin_layout Itemize
4663 \begin_layout Itemize
4669 \begin_layout Itemize
4675 \begin_layout Itemize
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4683 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4687 , rather than resetting it to
4692 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4693 \begin_inset space ~
4697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4699 reference "sec:Nesting"
4706 \begin_layout Subsection
4710 \begin_layout Standard
4711 The default paragraph environment is
4716 It creates a plain paragraph.
4718 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4719 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4720 this manual) are in the
4727 \begin_layout Standard
4728 You can nest a paragraph using the
4732 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4740 \begin_layout Subsection
4742 \begin_inset Index idx
4745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4754 \begin_layout Standard
4755 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4756 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4765 for thanks or contact information.
4766 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4767 places all of this on a separate page
4768 along with today's date.
4769 For other types of documents, the title
4770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4777 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4781 \begin_layout Standard
4783 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4797 Here's how you use them:
4800 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 Put the title of your document in the
4808 \begin_layout Itemize
4809 Put the author name in the
4816 \begin_layout Itemize
4817 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4818 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4824 Note that using this environment is optional.
4825 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4826 will automatically insert today's date.
4827 If you don't want a date, use the option
4829 Suppress default date on front page
4833 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4834 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4836 \begin_inset space ~
4844 \begin_layout Standard
4845 You can use footnotes to insert
4846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4853 or contact information.
4856 \begin_layout Subsection
4858 \begin_inset Index idx
4861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4870 name "subsec:Headings"
4877 \begin_layout Standard
4878 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4880 takes care of the numbering for you.
4883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4885 \begin_inset Index idx
4888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4889 Section headings ! Numbered
4897 \begin_layout Standard
4898 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4902 \begin_layout Enumerate
4908 \begin_layout Enumerate
4914 \begin_layout Enumerate
4920 \begin_layout Enumerate
4926 \begin_layout Enumerate
4932 \begin_layout Enumerate
4938 \begin_layout Enumerate
4944 \begin_layout Standard
4946 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4947 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4948 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4951 \begin_layout Standard
4952 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4953 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4954 You group the book into chapters.
4956 does a similar grouping:
4959 \begin_layout Itemize
4964 is divided into either
4975 \begin_layout Itemize
4987 \begin_layout Itemize
4999 \begin_layout Itemize
5011 \begin_layout Itemize
5023 \begin_layout Itemize
5035 \begin_layout Standard
5036 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5044 Not all document types use the
5048 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5053 is the top-level heading.
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5066 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5067 labels it with its number,
5068 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5070 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5082 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5084 \begin_inset Index idx
5087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5088 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5096 \begin_layout Standard
5097 The unnumbered section headings have a
5098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5105 at the end of their name.
5106 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5107 the table of contents, see section
5108 \begin_inset space ~
5112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5122 Changing the Numbering
5123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5125 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5132 \begin_layout Standard
5133 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5134 in the Table of Contents.
5135 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5137 Just as certain classes start with
5151 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5161 This is something you can change.
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5171 \begin_inset Index idx
5174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 \begin_inset space ~
5187 \begin_inset space ~
5192 you will see two counters.
5197 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5198 numbers a section heading.
5199 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5204 Short Titles of Headings
5205 \begin_inset Index idx
5208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5209 Section headings ! Short titles
5215 \begin_inset Argument 1
5218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5227 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5234 \begin_layout Standard
5235 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5236 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5237 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5238 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5241 \begin_layout Standard
5243 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5244 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5245 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5246 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5251 \begin_inset space ~
5257 This will insert a box labeled
5258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5262 \begin_inset space ~
5266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5269 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5270 This also works for captions inside floats.
5271 There can only be one short title per title.
5274 \begin_layout Standard
5275 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5283 The following information applies to all section headings:
5286 \begin_layout Itemize
5287 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5290 \begin_layout Itemize
5291 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5294 \begin_layout Itemize
5295 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5298 \begin_layout Itemize
5299 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5302 \begin_layout Subsection
5306 \begin_layout Standard
5308 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5322 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5323 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5324 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5325 the text they contain.
5326 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5334 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5337 \begin_layout Standard
5338 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5347 when you start a new paragraph.
5348 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5352 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5353 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5354 have to change back to the
5358 environment yourself.
5361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5370 \begin_inset Index idx
5373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5382 \begin_layout Standard
5383 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5384 time for the differences.
5393 are identical except for one difference:
5397 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5406 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5409 \begin_layout Standard
5410 Here's an example of the
5423 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5425 See – no indentation!
5429 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5430 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5431 the other paragraph.
5434 \begin_layout Standard
5435 Here's another example, this time in the
5442 \begin_layout Quotation
5448 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5449 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5450 the first line, then
5454 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5458 you were quoting other text.
5461 \begin_layout Quotation
5462 Here's a new paragraph.
5463 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5464 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5467 \begin_layout Standard
5468 As the examples show,
5472 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5473 They should put quotes in the
5478 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5482 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5487 \begin_inset Index idx
5490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5497 \begin_inset Index idx
5500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5516 \begin_layout Standard
5521 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5527 \begin_inset Newline newline
5530 Which I did not rehearse!
5534 It could be much worse.
5535 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5537 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5538 indented a bit more than the first.
5539 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5545 \begin_inset Newline newline
5548 And make things look fine
5549 \begin_inset Newline newline
5555 arg "newline-insert newline"
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5566 does not indent both margins.
5567 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5568 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5571 arg "newline-insert newline"
5577 \begin_layout Subsection
5579 \begin_inset Index idx
5582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5589 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5598 \begin_layout Standard
5600 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5610 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5611 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5620 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5621 lets you provide your own label.
5622 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5623 describing some general features of all four of them.
5626 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5630 \begin_layout Standard
5631 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5633 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5634 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5643 reset the environment to
5647 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5648 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5649 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5653 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5657 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5666 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5667 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5669 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5670 you read all of section
5671 \begin_inset space ~
5675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5677 reference "sec:Nesting"
5684 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5686 \begin_inset Index idx
5689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5705 \begin_layout Standard
5706 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5710 paragraph environment.
5711 It has the following properties:
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5716 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5723 \begin_layout Itemize
5725 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5728 \begin_layout Itemize
5729 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5733 \begin_layout Itemize
5734 The items can have any length.
5736 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5737 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5744 \begin_layout Itemize
5749 environment inside another
5753 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5754 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5761 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5765 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5770 \begin_layout Itemize
5772 \begin_inset space ~
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5778 reference "sec:Nesting"
5782 for a full explanation of nesting.
5786 \begin_layout Standard
5787 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5796 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5799 \begin_layout Standard
5800 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5801 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5804 \begin_layout Itemize
5805 The label for the first level
5809 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5810 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5817 \begin_layout Itemize
5818 The label for the second level is a dash.
5819 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5828 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5840 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 Back out to the third level.
5845 \begin_layout Itemize
5846 Back to the second level.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 Back to the outermost level.
5854 \begin_layout Standard
5855 These are the default labels for an
5860 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5862 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5865 dialog in the submenu
5870 \begin_inset Index idx
5873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5879 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5883 \begin_layout Standard
5884 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5885 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5887 \begin_inset space ~
5891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5893 reference "sec:Nesting"
5900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5902 \begin_inset Index idx
5905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5914 name "sec:Enumerate"
5921 \begin_layout Standard
5926 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5927 It has these properties:
5930 \begin_layout Enumerate
5931 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5932 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5939 \begin_layout Enumerate
5940 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5944 \begin_layout Enumerate
5946 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5949 \begin_layout Enumerate
5954 environment resets the counter to one.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5967 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5974 \begin_layout Enumerate
5975 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5976 Items can have any length.
5979 \begin_layout Enumerate
5980 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5983 \begin_layout Enumerate
5984 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5987 \begin_layout Enumerate
5988 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5992 \begin_layout Standard
6001 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6003 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6004 labels the four different levels in an
6011 \begin_layout Enumerate
6012 The first level of an
6016 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6017 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6025 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6026 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6035 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6042 \begin_layout Enumerate
6043 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6053 Back to the third level
6057 \begin_layout Enumerate
6058 Back to the second level.
6062 \begin_layout Enumerate
6063 Back to the outermost level.
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6067 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6071 environment, see section
6072 \begin_inset space ~
6076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6078 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6083 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6087 \begin_layout Standard
6088 There is more to nesting
6092 environments than we've stated here.
6093 You should read section
6094 \begin_inset space ~
6098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6100 reference "sec:Nesting"
6104 to learn more about nesting.
6107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6109 \begin_inset Index idx
6112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6121 \begin_layout Standard
6122 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6126 list has no fixed label.
6127 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6136 of the first line as the label.
6140 \begin_layout Description
6141 Example: This is an example of the
6148 \begin_layout Standard
6150 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6154 \begin_layout Standard
6156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6163 it is meant that the first usage of the
6167 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6169 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6177 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6183 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6185 \begin_inset space ~
6191 \begin_inset space ~
6195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6197 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6201 for more information.) Here is an example:
6204 \begin_layout Description
6206 \begin_inset space ~
6209 Example: This one shows how to use a
6212 \begin_inset space ~
6224 \begin_layout Description
6225 Usage: You should use the
6229 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6230 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6232 It's not a good idea to use a
6236 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6237 You're better off using
6249 paragraphs into them.
6252 \begin_layout Description
6253 Nesting: You can nest
6257 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6261 \begin_layout Standard
6262 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6263 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6264 them from the first line.
6267 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6269 \begin_inset Index idx
6272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6281 \begin_layout Standard
6286 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6287 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6291 \begin_layout Standard
6300 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6302 Here are its properties:
6305 \begin_layout Labeling
6306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6308 \begin_inset space ~
6311 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6320 of each line as the item label.
6325 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6326 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6327 space as described above.
6330 \begin_layout Labeling
6331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6332 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6333 uses different margins for the item label and the
6334 body of the item text.
6335 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6336 label width plus a little extra space.
6340 \begin_layout Labeling
6341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6343 \begin_inset space ~
6346 width \SpecialChar LyX
6347 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6348 If the label width is larger, the label
6349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6356 into the first line.
6357 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6358 margin of the rest of the item text.
6361 \begin_layout Labeling
6362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6364 \begin_inset space ~
6367 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6372 environment has the same left margin.
6373 \begin_inset Newline newline
6376 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6381 \begin_inset space ~
6386 dialog (toolbar button
6389 arg "layout-paragraph"
6396 \begin_inset space ~
6401 determines the default label width.
6402 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6411 multiple times instead.
6412 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6422 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6425 \begin_inset space ~
6430 every time you alter a label in a
6435 \begin_inset Newline newline
6438 The predefined default width is the length of
6439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6447 \begin_inset space ~
6453 \begin_layout Standard
6458 list the same way as the
6462 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6468 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6472 \begin_layout Standard
6477 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6478 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6480 \begin_inset space ~
6484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6486 reference "sec:Nesting"
6490 to learn about nesting.
6493 \begin_layout Standard
6494 There is yet another feature of the
6498 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6499 left-justifies the item labels by
6501 You can use additional
6505 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6506 justifies the item label.
6511 are documented in section
6512 \begin_inset space ~
6516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6518 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6523 Here are some examples:
6526 \begin_layout Labeling
6527 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6528 Left The default for
6535 \begin_layout Labeling
6536 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6537 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6544 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6547 \begin_layout Labeling
6548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6549 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6553 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6560 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6563 \begin_layout Subsection
6565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6567 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6572 \begin_inset Index idx
6575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6584 \begin_layout Standard
6585 The features described in this section require that the module
6587 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6589 is loaded in the document settings.
6590 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6596 \begin_inset Index idx
6599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6601 -packages ! enumitem
6609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6610 Custom Enumerate Lists
6611 \begin_inset Index idx
6614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6615 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6623 \begin_layout Standard
6625 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6631 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6632 There you add the command
6635 \begin_layout Standard
6643 \begin_layout Standard
6655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6657 Code, look at section
6658 \begin_inset space ~
6662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6664 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6677 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6684 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6685 For capital Roman numerals replace
6697 in the command above.
6698 For Arabic numerals use
6706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6713 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6728 \begin_layout Standard
6730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6738 You can only number 26
6739 \begin_inset space ~
6742 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6752 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6755 \begin_layout Standard
6756 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6759 \begin_layout Enumerate
6760 \begin_inset Argument 1
6763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6786 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6793 \begin_layout Enumerate
6794 \begin_inset Argument 1
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6820 \begin_layout Enumerate
6822 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate
6830 \begin_inset Argument 1
6833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6861 \begin_layout Enumerate
6862 \begin_inset Argument 1
6865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Standard
6892 For this list these commands were used:
6895 \begin_layout Standard
6906 \begin_inset Newline newline
6914 \begin_inset Newline newline
6922 \begin_inset Newline newline
6932 \begin_layout Standard
6939 makes the label emphasized and
6948 \begin_layout Standard
6949 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6958 lists until you change the definition.
6966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6968 \begin_inset Index idx
6971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6972 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6981 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6985 \begin_inset Argument 1
6988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7007 \begin_inset Note Note
7010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7011 goes back to default numbering
7019 \begin_layout Enumerate
7023 \begin_layout Standard
7027 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7031 \begin_layout Standard
7032 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7037 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7038 to indicate that it is a resumed
7039 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7040 , but in the output.
7043 \begin_layout Standard
7044 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7052 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7061 \begin_layout Standard
7062 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7064 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7065 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7066 of a normal enumeration.
7067 There, insert the command
7070 \begin_layout Standard
7076 \begin_layout Standard
7081 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Enumerate
7093 \begin_layout Standard
7094 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7097 \begin_layout Enumerate
7098 \begin_inset Argument 1
7101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7117 This enumeration starts at 4
7120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7122 \begin_inset Index idx
7125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7134 \begin_layout Standard
7135 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7137 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7140 \begin_layout Itemize
7144 \begin_layout Itemize
7145 with standard spacing
7148 \begin_layout Standard
7149 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7151 Add there the command
7155 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7158 \begin_layout Itemize
7159 \begin_inset Argument 1
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7181 \begin_layout Itemize
7185 \begin_layout Itemize
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7197 \begin_inset Index idx
7200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7202 -packages ! enumitem
7208 For more information see its documentation,
7209 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7218 \begin_layout Standard
7219 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7221 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7222 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7226 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7229 \begin_layout Enumerate
7230 \begin_inset Argument 1
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7241 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7254 \begin_layout Enumerate
7255 with negative indentation
7258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7259 Further Customization
7260 \begin_inset Index idx
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7264 Lists ! Customization
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7273 You can also change the style of description lists.
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7283 \begin_layout Standard
7284 changes the description label font, the command
7287 \begin_layout Standard
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7294 sets the list style.
7297 \begin_layout Standard
7298 An example where the command
7301 \begin_layout Standard
7306 itshape, style=nextline
7309 \begin_layout Standard
7313 \begin_layout Description
7315 \begin_inset space ~
7319 \begin_inset Argument 1
7322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7328 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7330 itshape, style=nextline
7340 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7341 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7345 \begin_layout Description
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7350 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7351 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7352 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7356 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7362 \begin_inset Index idx
7365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7367 -packages ! enumitem
7373 For more information see its documentation
7374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7383 \begin_layout Subsection
7385 \begin_inset Index idx
7388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7402 Address: An Overview
7405 \begin_layout Standard
7406 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7407 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7421 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7422 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7423 gags on the document.
7424 In contrast, you can use the
7431 \begin_inset space ~
7436 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7437 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7441 \begin_layout Standard
7442 Of course, you're not limited to using
7449 \begin_inset space ~
7458 \begin_inset space ~
7463 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7464 some European academic papers.
7467 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7471 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7478 \begin_layout Standard
7483 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7484 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7488 \begin_inset space ~
7493 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7494 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7495 Here's an example of each:
7498 \begin_layout Right Address
7500 \begin_inset Newline newline
7504 \begin_inset Newline newline
7508 \begin_inset Newline newline
7511 When is it? What is today?
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7524 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7526 the largest block of text on a single line.
7527 Here's an example of the
7534 \begin_layout Address
7536 \begin_inset Newline newline
7539 Where do I send this
7540 \begin_inset Newline newline
7543 Your post office and country
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7547 As you can see, both
7554 \begin_inset space ~
7559 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7564 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7565 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7571 This makes sense, since
7579 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7580 Thus, you have to use
7587 arg "newline-insert newline"
7592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7593 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7595 \begin_inset space ~
7599 \begin_inset space ~
7604 ) to start a new line in an
7611 \begin_inset space ~
7619 \begin_layout Subsection
7623 \begin_layout Standard
7624 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7625 or list of references.
7627 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7632 \begin_inset Index idx
7635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7644 \begin_layout Standard
7649 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7650 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7651 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7652 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7666 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7667 The book document classes ignores the
7671 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7675 in a letter document class.
7678 \begin_layout Standard
7683 environment does several things for you.
7684 First, it puts the centered label
7685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7693 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7695 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7696 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7697 the subsequent text.
7698 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7700 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7704 \begin_layout Standard
7705 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7709 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7710 The new paragraph will still be in the
7715 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7716 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7720 \begin_inset Float figure
7725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7727 \begin_inset Graphics
7728 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7736 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7741 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7763 We would love to demonstrate the
7767 environment, but since this document is in the
7768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7775 class, we can't do this.
7776 We inserted it therefore as figure
7777 \begin_inset space ~
7781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7783 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7788 If you have never heard of an
7789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7796 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7801 \begin_inset Index idx
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7813 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7820 \begin_layout Standard
7825 environment is used to list references.
7826 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7827 only use it at the end of the document.
7839 \begin_layout Standard
7840 When you first open a
7844 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7845 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7861 depending on the document class.
7862 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7863 Each paragraph of the
7867 environment is a bibliography entry.
7872 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7873 Each new paragraph is still in the
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7881 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7882 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7884 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7886 handling, have a look at section
7887 \begin_inset space ~
7891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7893 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7900 \begin_layout Subsection
7901 Special Environments
7904 \begin_layout Standard
7906 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7907 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7910 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7915 \begin_inset Index idx
7918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7928 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7935 \begin_layout Standard
7941 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7943 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7948 key as a fixed whitespace.
7952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7970 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7984 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7987 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7990 arg "newline-insert newline"
8007 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8008 So, when you finish using the
8013 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8014 Also, you can nest the
8019 environment inside of others.
8022 \begin_layout Standard
8023 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8026 \begin_layout Itemize
8030 arg "newline-insert newline"
8033 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8038 \begin_inset space \space{}
8048 arg "newline-insert newline"
8054 \begin_layout Itemize
8058 arg "newline-insert newline"
8068 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8074 \begin_layout Itemize
8075 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8076 You must put at least one
8080 in any line you want blank.
8081 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8085 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8090 since that will insert
8095 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8098 arg "self-insert \""
8104 \begin_layout Standard
8108 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8112 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8116 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8120 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8124 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8125 printf("Hello World!
8130 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8134 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8138 \begin_layout Standard
8139 This is just the standard
8140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8157 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8159 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8160 as if you used a typewriter.
8161 \begin_inset Index idx
8164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8165 Paragraph environments|)
8170 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8173 Program Code Listings
8178 \begin_inset space ~
8186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8190 \begin_inset Index idx
8193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8207 environment is similar to the
8212 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8213 computer console text.
8218 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8232 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8233 you can have empty lines.
8246 \begin_layout Itemize
8247 have a certain language and a text style
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8251 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8252 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8253 and \SpecialChar TeX
8257 \begin_layout Standard
8258 Because of these properties
8262 works like a typewriter.
8266 \begin_layout Verbatim
8271 \begin_layout Verbatim
8275 The following 2 lines are empty:
8278 \begin_layout Verbatim
8282 \begin_layout Verbatim
8286 \begin_layout Verbatim
8288 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8293 \begin_layout Section
8294 Nesting Environments
8295 \begin_inset Index idx
8298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8299 Nesting ! Environments
8305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8314 \begin_layout Subsection
8318 \begin_layout Standard
8320 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8322 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8324 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8326 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8338 \begin_layout Enumerate
8342 \begin_layout Enumerate
8344 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8351 \begin_layout Enumerate
8355 \begin_layout Enumerate
8360 \begin_layout Enumerate
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8365 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8366 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8368 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8370 \begin_inset space ~
8374 \begin_inset space ~
8382 \begin_inset space ~
8386 \begin_inset space ~
8391 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8393 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8396 arg "depth-increment"
8402 arg "depth-decrement"
8416 arg "depth-increment"
8422 arg "depth-decrement"
8426 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8427 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8431 \begin_layout Standard
8432 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8433 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8434 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8435 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8436 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8439 \begin_layout Standard
8440 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8442 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8444 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8447 \begin_layout Subsection
8448 What You Can and Can't Nest
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8452 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8453 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8456 \begin_layout Standard
8457 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8458 than a simple yes or no.
8459 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 Completely unnestable
8466 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8476 \begin_layout Standard
8477 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8478 environments have them:
8481 \begin_layout Description
8482 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8483 Can't nest into them.
8484 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8497 \begin_layout Itemize
8503 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 \begin_layout Itemize
8515 \begin_layout Itemize
8522 \begin_layout Description
8524 \begin_inset space ~
8527 Nestable You can nest them.
8528 You can nest other things into them.
8529 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Description
8593 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8594 You can't nest anything into them.
8595 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_inset space ~
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Standard
8698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8706 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8716 \begin_inset space ~
8719 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8720 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8721 nested section headings violate this.
8729 \begin_layout Subsection
8730 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8731 \begin_inset Index idx
8734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8735 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8743 \begin_layout Standard
8744 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8745 affected by nesting anyhow.
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Standard
8763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8771 Figures and tables in
8775 are not affected by this.
8780 Have a look at section
8781 \begin_inset space ~
8785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8787 reference "sec:Floats"
8791 for more information about
8798 \begin_layout Standard
8800 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8801 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8805 \begin_layout Standard
8806 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8814 of its own, it behaves just like a
8815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8822 paragraph environment.
8823 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 Here's an example with a table:
8831 \begin_layout Enumerate
8833 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8840 \begin_layout Enumerate
8841 This is (a) and it's nested.
8842 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 \begin_inset Tabular
8859 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8860 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8946 \begin_layout Standard
8947 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8954 \begin_layout Enumerate
8956 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8960 \begin_layout Enumerate
8964 \begin_layout Standard
8965 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8968 \begin_layout Enumerate
8970 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8977 \begin_layout Enumerate
8978 This is (a) and it's nested.
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8989 \begin_layout Standard
8991 \begin_inset Tabular
8992 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8993 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8995 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9079 \begin_layout Standard
9080 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9086 \begin_layout Enumerate
9093 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9096 \begin_layout Enumerate
9100 \begin_layout Standard
9101 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9105 \begin_layout Standard
9106 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9109 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9112 \begin_layout Enumerate
9114 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9121 \begin_layout Enumerate
9122 This is (a) and it's nested.
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Standard
9134 \begin_inset Tabular
9135 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9136 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9137 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9138 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9223 \begin_layout Standard
9224 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9230 \begin_layout Enumerate
9232 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9239 \begin_layout Enumerate
9243 \begin_layout Standard
9244 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9250 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9251 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9255 \begin_layout Subsection
9256 Usage and General Features
9259 \begin_layout Standard
9260 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9261 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9270 is the innermost possible depth.
9271 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9274 \begin_layout Enumerate
9275 level #1 – outermost
9276 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9283 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9292 \begin_layout Enumerate
9294 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9301 \begin_layout Enumerate
9303 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9310 \begin_layout Itemize
9312 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9319 \begin_layout Itemize
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9330 both of them in the example.
9331 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9341 For example, if we tried to nest another
9346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9353 , we would get errors.
9356 \begin_layout Subsection
9358 \begin_inset Index idx
9361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9370 \begin_layout Standard
9371 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9372 We have several examples of nested environments.
9373 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9378 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9381 \begin_layout Labeling
9382 \labelwidthstring MMM
9383 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9389 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9396 \begin_layout Labeling
9397 \labelwidthstring MMM
9398 #2-a This is level #2.
9399 We created it by using
9402 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9408 arg "depth-increment"
9412 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9419 \begin_layout Labeling
9420 \labelwidthstring MMM
9421 #3-a This is level #3.
9422 This time, we just enter
9429 arg "depth-increment"
9433 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9437 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9454 \begin_layout Standard
9459 environment, nested inside of
9460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9468 So, it's at level #4.
9469 We did this by entering
9472 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9478 arg "depth-increment"
9481 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9486 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9502 \begin_layout Standard
9507 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9510 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9516 \begin_layout Labeling
9517 \labelwidthstring MMM
9518 #4-a This is level #4.
9522 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9525 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9530 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9534 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9539 keep nesting things inside
9540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9548 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9555 \begin_layout Labeling
9556 \labelwidthstring MMM
9557 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9559 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9566 \begin_layout Labeling
9567 \labelwidthstring MMM
9568 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9569 and this is level #6.
9570 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9574 \begin_layout Labeling
9575 \labelwidthstring MMM
9576 #5-b Back to level #5.
9580 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9586 arg "depth-decrement"
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9598 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9604 arg "depth-decrement"
9607 , we're back at level #4.
9611 \begin_layout Labeling
9612 \labelwidthstring MMM
9613 #3-b Back to level #3.
9614 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9620 #2-b Back to level #2.
9625 \begin_layout Labeling
9626 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9628 After this sentence, we will enter
9632 and change the paragraph environment back to
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9640 We could have also used the
9656 environment in place of the
9661 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9665 Example 2: Inheritance
9668 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9669 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9670 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9673 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9682 arg "depth-increment"
9686 \begin_inset Newline newline
9689 which, we will change to the
9694 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9701 \begin_layout Enumerate
9706 environment, at level #2.
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9710 Notice how the nested
9714 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9719 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9723 \begin_layout Standard
9724 We ended this example by entering
9729 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9733 and reset the nesting depth by using
9736 arg "depth-decrement"
9742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9743 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9752 \begin_inset Argument 1
9755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9756 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9764 \begin_layout Enumerate
9765 This is level #1, in an
9769 paragraph environment.
9770 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9771 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9778 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9789 arg "depth-increment"
9793 Now, what happens if we nest an
9797 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9798 label be? An asterisk?
9799 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9806 \begin_layout Itemize
9816 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9817 So, its label is a bullet.
9818 (We got here by using
9821 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9827 arg "depth-increment"
9830 , then changing the environment to
9835 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9842 \begin_layout Itemize
9843 Here's level #4, produced using
9846 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9852 arg "depth-increment"
9856 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9858 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9865 \begin_layout Enumerate
9868 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9873 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9877 , because we are in the
9885 environment (that is, it is an
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9905 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9906 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9910 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9924 arg "depth-decrement"
9927 to decrease the depth after the next
9930 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9937 \begin_layout Enumerate
9939 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9947 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9961 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9966 reset the counter for the label.
9970 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9980 arg "depth-decrement"
9983 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9984 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9985 into the twofold-nested
9993 \begin_layout Enumerate
9994 The same thing happens if we do another
9997 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10003 arg "depth-decrement"
10006 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10009 \begin_layout Standard
10010 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10015 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10026 The number of other
10030 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10037 The same rule applies for the
10041 environment, as well.
10044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10045 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10048 \begin_layout Enumerate
10049 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10050 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10051 the same detail with how we did it.
10057 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10064 \begin_layout Standard
10072 arg "depth-increment"
10079 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10080 the example in parentheses someplace.
10081 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10082 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10083 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10087 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10093 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10100 \begin_layout Verse
10101 Now we will add verse.
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10105 It will get much worse.
10106 \begin_inset Newline newline
10116 arg "depth-increment"
10126 \begin_layout Verse
10127 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10128 \begin_inset Newline newline
10131 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10132 \begin_inset Newline newline
10138 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10146 \begin_layout Verse
10147 Here comes a table:
10148 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10164 \begin_inset Tabular
10165 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10166 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10253 \begin_layout Verse
10257 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10267 arg "depth-increment"
10273 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10279 \begin_inset Newline newline
10287 arg "depth-decrement"
10294 \begin_layout Enumerate
10299 : level #1) This is another item.
10300 Note that selecting a
10304 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10305 3 times to put the table inside the
10313 \begin_layout Quotation
10314 We're now ending the
10318 list and changing to
10323 We're still at level #1.
10324 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10325 The next set of paragraphs is a
10326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10333 We will nest both the
10340 \begin_inset space ~
10345 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10349 for the letter body.
10353 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10356 to preserve the depth.
10357 Remember that you need to use
10360 arg "newline-insert newline"
10363 to create multiple lines inside the
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10377 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10384 \begin_layout Right Address
10386 \begin_inset Newline newline
10389 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10390 \begin_inset Newline newline
10396 \begin_layout Address
10398 \begin_inset space ~
10404 \begin_layout Quotation
10405 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10409 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10410 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10411 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10412 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10413 as soon as possible.
10414 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Quotation
10418 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10419 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10420 with your order, along with payment.
10423 \begin_layout Quotation
10424 We thank you again for your patience.
10427 \begin_layout Address
10429 \begin_inset Newline newline
10436 \begin_layout Quotation
10437 That ends that example!
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10442 gives you a lot of power with just
10444 We could have easily nested an
10465 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10468 \begin_layout Subsection
10470 \begin_inset Index idx
10473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10474 Nesting ! Separation
10480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10482 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10489 \begin_layout Standard
10490 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10492 For example you need two different enumerations:
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10504 \begin_layout Enumerate
10506 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10513 \begin_layout Enumerate
10517 \begin_layout Standard
10518 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10524 \begin_layout Itemize
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10537 \begin_layout Enumerate
10541 \begin_layout Enumerate
10545 \begin_layout Enumerate
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10550 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10551 list item and use the menu
10553 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10554 Start New Environment
10557 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10559 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10562 arg "paragraph-break"
10566 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10567 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10568 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10569 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10572 \begin_layout Standard
10573 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10576 arg "paragraph-break"
10579 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10582 \begin_layout Section
10583 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10584 \begin_inset Index idx
10587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10596 \begin_layout Standard
10597 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10598 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10600 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10601 be broken at the end of a line.
10602 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10606 \begin_layout Subsection
10608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10610 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10615 \begin_inset Index idx
10618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10627 \begin_layout Standard
10628 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10629 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10630 ) not to break the line at
10632 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10635 \begin_layout Quote
10636 Further documentation is given in section
10637 \begin_inset Newline newline
10641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10643 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10651 \begin_layout Standard
10652 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10667 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10676 A protected space is set with
10678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10679 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10681 \begin_inset space ~
10689 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10695 \begin_layout Subsection
10697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10699 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10704 \begin_inset Index idx
10707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10708 Spacing ! Horizontal
10716 \begin_layout Standard
10717 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10720 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10724 The length units are listed in Appendix
10725 \begin_inset space ~
10729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10731 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10738 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10740 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10742 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10747 \begin_inset Index idx
10750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10751 Spaces ! Inter-word
10759 \begin_layout Standard
10760 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10761 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10762 at the ends of sentences.
10763 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10764 automatically takes care about this.
10765 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10766 followed by a period; see section
10767 \begin_inset space ~
10771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10773 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10778 To insert a normal space, select
10780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10781 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10783 \begin_inset space ~
10791 arg "space-insert normal"
10797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10801 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10806 \begin_inset Index idx
10809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10818 \begin_layout Standard
10820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10827 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10836 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10837 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10838 inside abbreviations:
10841 \begin_layout Quote
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10850 \begin_layout Standard
10851 or between values and units.
10852 Compare for example this:
10853 \begin_inset Newline newline
10857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10861 \begin_inset Newline newline
10864 10 kg (normal space
10867 \begin_layout Standard
10868 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10871 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10881 arg "space-insert thin"
10887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10891 \begin_layout Standard
10892 You can also insert the following space types:
10895 \begin_layout Description
10897 \begin_inset space ~
10901 \begin_inset space ~
10904 space A line with a
10905 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10909 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10913 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10916 negative thin space between the arrows.
10919 \begin_layout Description
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10925 \begin_inset space ~
10928 space A line with a
10929 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10933 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10937 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10940 negative medium space between the arrows.
10943 \begin_layout Description
10945 \begin_inset space ~
10949 \begin_inset space ~
10952 space A line with a
10953 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10957 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10961 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10964 negative thick space between the arrows.
10967 \begin_layout Description
10969 \begin_inset space ~
10973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10977 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10981 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10985 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10989 \begin_inset space ~
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 em) space between the arrows.
10999 \begin_layout Description
11001 \begin_inset space ~
11005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11009 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11013 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11017 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11021 \begin_inset space ~
11025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11028 em) space between the arrows.
11031 \begin_layout Description
11033 \begin_inset space ~
11037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11041 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11045 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11049 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11053 \begin_inset space ~
11057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11060 em) space between the arrows.
11063 \begin_layout Description
11065 \begin_inset space ~
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11073 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11078 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11085 cm space between the arrows.
11088 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset space ~
11094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11096 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11100 lists the different space sizes.
11103 \begin_layout Standard
11104 \begin_inset Float table
11109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11115 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11119 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 \begin_inset Tabular
11130 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11131 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11408 \begin_inset Index idx
11411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11422 feature for adding extra space
11423 in a uniform fashion.
11424 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11425 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11426 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11427 equally between themselves.
11430 \begin_layout Standard
11431 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11434 \begin_layout Quote
11436 This is on the left side
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 This is on the right
11443 \begin_layout Quote
11446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11456 \begin_layout Quote
11459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11473 \begin_layout Standard
11474 That was an example in the
11480 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11484 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11488 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11491 is one in a standard paragraph.
11492 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11496 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11500 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11508 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11523 \begin_layout Standard
11525 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_layout Standard
11537 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11541 \begin_inset space ~
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11549 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11553 \begin_inset space ~
11559 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11565 \begin_inset space ~
11571 \begin_layout Standard
11573 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11577 \begin_inset space ~
11583 \begin_layout Standard
11584 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11592 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11596 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11598 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11599 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11603 option in the space dialog.
11611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11615 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11620 \begin_inset Index idx
11623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11632 \begin_layout Standard
11633 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11634 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11637 \begin_layout Standard
11638 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11641 What is correct English?:
11642 \begin_inset Newline newline
11646 \begin_inset Newline newline
11650 \begin_inset space ~
11653 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11654 \begin_inset Newline newline
11658 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11669 \begin_inset Newline newline
11673 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11684 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11690 \begin_layout Standard
11692 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11697 \begin_inset space ~
11701 \begin_inset space ~
11705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11709 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11712 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11716 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11722 \begin_inset space ~
11726 \begin_inset space ~
11730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11733 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11742 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11743 That is why it is named
11744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11752 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11753 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11757 \begin_layout Subsection
11759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11761 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11766 \begin_inset Index idx
11769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11778 \begin_layout Standard
11779 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11782 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11784 \begin_inset space ~
11790 There you find the following sizes:
11793 \begin_layout Standard
11806 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11807 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11812 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11814 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11815 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11817 \begin_inset space ~
11823 \begin_inset Index idx
11826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11827 Document ! Settings
11832 for the paragraph separation.
11833 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11844 \begin_layout Standard
11850 \begin_inset Index idx
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11859 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11860 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11865 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11866 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11875 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11884 s are described in section
11885 \begin_inset space ~
11889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11891 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11900 If there are several
11904 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11905 You can therefore use
11909 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11912 \begin_layout Standard
11917 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11918 \begin_inset space ~
11922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11924 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11931 \begin_layout Standard
11932 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11942 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11943 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11955 \begin_layout Subsection
11956 Paragraph Alignment
11957 \begin_inset Index idx
11960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11961 Paragraph ! Alignment
11969 \begin_layout Standard
11970 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11972 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11975 dialog (toolbar button
11978 arg "layout-paragraph"
11982 There are five possibilities:
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12041 \begin_layout Itemize
12049 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12056 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12057 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12058 the left and right margins.
12059 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12060 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12066 \begin_layout Standard
12068 This paragraph is right aligned,
12071 \begin_layout Standard
12073 this one is centered,
12076 \begin_layout Standard
12078 this one is left aligned.
12081 \begin_layout Subsection
12083 \begin_inset Index idx
12086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12087 Page breaks ! Forced
12093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12095 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12104 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12105 force a page break where you want one.
12106 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12107 is good at page breaking.
12108 Only if you use a lot of
12112 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12113 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12116 \begin_layout Standard
12117 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12118 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12122 have to change the page breaking.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12128 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12131 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12133 \begin_inset space ~
12139 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12141 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12142 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12144 \begin_inset space ~
12149 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12151 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12152 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12155 \begin_layout Standard
12156 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12157 at the top of a page.
12158 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12160 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12161 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12162 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12166 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12170 to learn more about
12177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12181 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12186 \begin_inset Index idx
12189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12190 Page breaks ! Clear
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12199 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12200 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12201 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12202 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12203 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12206 \begin_layout Standard
12207 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12210 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12218 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12221 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12223 \begin_inset space ~
12227 \begin_inset space ~
12232 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12233 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12236 \begin_layout Subsection
12238 \begin_inset Index idx
12241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12250 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12257 \begin_layout Standard
12258 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12260 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 \begin_inset space ~
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12277 arg "newline-insert newline"
12281 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12284 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12286 \begin_inset space ~
12290 \begin_inset space ~
12298 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12301 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12303 This is useful to avoid
12304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12311 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12314 \begin_layout Standard
12315 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12316 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12318 very good at line breaking.
12319 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12320 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12321 \begin_inset space ~
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Quote"
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12334 reference "sec:Verse"
12339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12341 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12348 \begin_layout Subsection
12350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12352 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12357 \begin_inset Index idx
12360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12371 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12387 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12389 \begin_inset space ~
12394 you can insert horizontal lines.
12395 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12396 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12397 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12402 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12413 \begin_layout Section
12414 Characters and Symbols
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12419 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12420 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12428 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12432 for information on how this is done.
12435 \begin_layout Standard
12436 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12441 dialog via the menu
12443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12444 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12450 \begin_layout Standard
12451 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12459 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12460 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12462 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12470 \begin_layout Section
12471 Fonts and Text Styles
12472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12474 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12481 \begin_layout Subsection
12483 \begin_inset Index idx
12486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12495 \begin_layout Standard
12496 There are two types of fonts:
12499 \begin_layout Description
12501 \begin_inset space ~
12505 \begin_inset Index idx
12508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12514 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12519 characters) in the font.
12520 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12521 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12522 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12523 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12524 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12525 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12526 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12527 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12531 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12532 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12533 sizes than at small ones.
12534 \begin_inset Newline newline
12548 \begin_inset space ~
12556 \begin_layout Description
12558 \begin_inset space ~
12562 \begin_inset Index idx
12565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12571 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12572 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12573 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12574 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12575 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12576 image manipulation program.
12577 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12578 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12579 \begin_inset space ~
12582 pixels high up to 34
12583 \begin_inset space ~
12586 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12587 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12588 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12590 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12591 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12592 \begin_inset Newline newline
12595 Bitmap fonts are named
12598 \begin_inset space ~
12603 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12606 \begin_layout Standard
12607 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12608 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12609 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12610 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12611 use scalable fonts.
12614 \begin_layout Standard
12615 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12618 \begin_layout Standard
12619 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12620 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12621 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12622 font to emphasize text, you use an
12623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12631 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12633 In \SpecialChar LyX
12634 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12638 \begin_layout Subsection
12641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12643 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12650 \begin_layout Standard
12651 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 used its own fonts.
12653 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12654 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12657 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12659 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12660 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12661 to a word processor.
12662 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12663 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12664 files are very portable across
12665 different machines.
12666 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 has increased a lot
12668 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12671 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12673 \begin_inset space ~
12677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12679 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12684 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12685 code in the document
12686 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12691 engines that are also able directly
12692 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12694 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12696 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12698 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12699 that is installed on your system.
12700 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12703 \begin_layout Standard
12704 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12713 es; so you might have to experiment.
12721 \begin_layout Standard
12722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12731 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12732 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12733 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12734 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12743 \begin_layout Subsection
12744 Document Font and Font size
12745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12747 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12752 \begin_inset Index idx
12755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12762 \begin_inset Index idx
12765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12774 \begin_layout Standard
12775 You can set the document fonts in the
12777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12781 \begin_inset Index idx
12784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12785 Document ! Settings
12795 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12796 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12808 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12813 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12816 \begin_layout Standard
12823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12832 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12833 This requires that you use
12839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12878 as the output format, i.
12879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12883 \begin_inset space \space{}
12886 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12887 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12888 installed (see section
12889 \begin_inset space ~
12893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12895 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12900 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12902 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12903 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12905 \begin_inset space ~
12908 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12909 cannot determine the family.
12910 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12911 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12914 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12917 \begin_layout Standard
12918 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12919 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12924 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12930 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12931 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12939 \begin_inset space ~
12945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12958 European Computer Modern
12961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12968 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12971 \begin_layout Standard
12980 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12981 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12986 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12989 \begin_inset space ~
12994 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13000 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13001 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13004 \begin_layout Itemize
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13013 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13026 \begin_inset space ~
13031 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13032 community in order to replace
13036 as the default font.
13037 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13038 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13041 \begin_inset space ~
13054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13055 One difference is improved kerning.
13063 \begin_layout Itemize
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13071 \begin_inset space ~
13076 fonts in (the rare) case that
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13084 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13099 Virtual means that it
13100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13111 -glyphs from other fonts.
13112 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13134 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13140 \begin_inset Index idx
13143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13145 -packages ! aeguill
13150 with the document preamble line
13151 \begin_inset Newline newline
13158 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13159 \begin_inset Newline newline
13164 will fix the guillemet problem.
13169 and that accented characters are not
13173 glyph, but built of
13177 characters, the accent and the letter.
13178 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13184 If you search for example for the French word
13185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13192 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13201 and not for the glyph
13202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13216 \begin_layout Itemize
13217 If you do not like the look of
13225 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13230 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13246 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13250 serif and typewriter fonts,
13254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13255 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13262 \begin_inset space ~
13271 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13276 \begin_inset space \space{}
13284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13288 \begin_inset space \space{}
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13302 \begin_inset space ~
13312 but you can also select your own.
13313 \begin_inset Newline newline
13316 The differences between roman,
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13328 fonts are explained in section
13329 \begin_inset space ~
13333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13335 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13340 \begin_inset Newline newline
13346 \begin_inset space ~
13351 was originally designed for newspapers.
13352 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13353 into the small newspaper columns.
13357 \begin_inset space ~
13362 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13365 \begin_layout Standard
13366 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13379 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13384 depends on the class you are using.
13385 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13388 \begin_layout Standard
13389 Note that the font size is the
13394 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13395 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13396 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13397 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13400 \begin_inset space ~
13406 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13407 \begin_inset space ~
13411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13413 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13420 \begin_layout Standard
13424 \begin_inset space ~
13429 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13431 \begin_inset space ~
13434 serif or typewriter.
13439 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13449 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13452 \begin_layout Standard
13461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13470 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13471 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13477 \begin_inset Index idx
13480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13482 -packages ! fontenc
13488 \begin_inset space ~
13492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13494 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13499 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13500 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13507 \begin_layout Standard
13508 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13510 Use Old Style Figures
13514 Use True Small Caps
13517 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13520 Use Old Style Figures
13522 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13524 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13532 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13536 Use True Small Caps
13538 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13539 of scaled capitals.
13540 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13541 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13544 \begin_layout Standard
13549 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13550 a font to display the script characters.
13554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13555 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13561 \begin_inset Index idx
13564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13571 So this has no effect for the document language
13585 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13589 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13602 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13603 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13605 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13607 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13610 dialog, see section
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13617 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13629 \begin_layout Subsection
13633 \begin_layout Standard
13634 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13635 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13637 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13638 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13639 choose a math font in the dialog
13641 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13645 \begin_inset Index idx
13648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13649 Document ! Settings
13655 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13656 automatically selects a math font.
13657 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13658 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13667 \begin_inset space ~
13673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13678 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13679 document font is available.
13682 \begin_layout Standard
13683 Note that the math font will not be used for
13687 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13693 or by the insertion of the command
13700 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13701 \begin_inset space ~
13705 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13706 while the math characters do not.
13708 \begin_inset space ~
13711 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13714 \begin_inset space ~
13722 \begin_inset space ~
13727 in the document font settings.
13730 \begin_layout Standard
13731 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13732 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13733 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13734 font (in most cases
13735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13741 \begin_inset space ~
13747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13750 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13751 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13759 \begin_inset space ~
13765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13771 \begin_layout Subsection
13772 Using Different Character Styles
13773 \begin_inset Index idx
13776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13783 \begin_inset Index idx
13786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13795 \begin_layout Standard
13796 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13797 automatically changes the character style for certain
13798 paragraph environments.
13800 supports two character styles,
13809 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13818 style, do one of the following:
13821 \begin_layout Itemize
13822 click on the toolbar button
13831 \begin_layout Itemize
13832 use the key binding
13841 \begin_layout Standard
13842 These commands are all toggles.
13847 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13850 \begin_layout Standard
13851 One typically uses the
13855 style for proper names.
13857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13864 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13873 A more widely used character style is the
13878 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13885 \begin_layout Itemize
13886 clicking on the toolbar button
13895 \begin_layout Itemize
13896 using the keybindings
13905 \begin_layout Standard
13910 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13912 use a different font.
13915 \begin_layout Standard
13916 We've been using the
13920 style all over the place in this document.
13921 Here's one more example:
13924 \begin_layout Quotation
13927 Do not overuse character styles!
13930 \begin_layout Standard
13931 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13932 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13933 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13934 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13938 \begin_layout Standard
13939 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13947 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13949 \begin_inset space ~
13952 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13958 arg "dialog-show character"
13964 \begin_layout Subsection
13965 Fine-Tuning with the
13970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13972 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13977 \begin_inset Index idx
13980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13989 \begin_layout Standard
13990 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13992 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13993 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13994 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13995 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13996 from ordinary dialog.
13999 \begin_layout Standard
14000 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
14001 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
14002 \begin_inset Newline newline
14005 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14006 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14009 \begin_layout Standard
14010 To use custom character styles, open the
14012 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14014 \begin_inset space ~
14017 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14020 dialog or press the toolbar button
14023 arg "dialog-show character"
14027 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14028 font property that you can choose.
14029 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14032 \begin_inset space ~
14037 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14042 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14043 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14044 environments all at once.
14047 \begin_layout Standard
14048 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
14051 \begin_inset space ~
14063 \begin_layout Labeling
14064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14078 The possible options are:
14079 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14086 \begin_layout Labeling
14087 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14092 This is the Roman font family.
14093 Normally a serif font.
14094 It's also the default family.
14104 \begin_layout Labeling
14105 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14109 \begin_inset space ~
14116 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14128 \begin_layout Labeling
14129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14136 This is the Typewriter font family.
14142 arg "font-typewriter"
14151 \begin_layout Labeling
14152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14157 This corresponds to the print weight.
14159 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14166 \begin_layout Labeling
14167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14172 This is the Medium font series.
14173 It's also the default series.
14176 \begin_layout Labeling
14177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14184 This is the Bold font series.
14197 \begin_layout Labeling
14198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14203 As the name implies.
14205 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14212 \begin_layout Labeling
14213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14218 This is the Upright font shape.
14219 It's also the default shape.
14222 \begin_layout Labeling
14223 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14237 s the Italic font shape
14243 \begin_layout Labeling
14244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14251 This is the Slanted font shape
14253 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14254 , this is different from italic).
14257 \begin_layout Labeling
14258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 \begin_inset space ~
14269 This is the Small caps font shape
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14282 Alters the text color.
14283 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14287 \begin_inset space ~
14292 , which means that the document default color set in
14294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14295 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14301 \begin_inset space ~
14306 is used, you can choose between
14339 \begin_inset Index idx
14342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14357 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14358 the language of the document.
14359 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14360 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14362 \begin_inset Newline newline
14365 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14367 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14368 When using the spell checking (see section
14369 \begin_inset space ~
14373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14375 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14379 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14382 \begin_layout Labeling
14383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 Alters the size of the font.
14389 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14390 proportional to the document font size.
14391 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14392 the details, but a general description of what
14395 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14402 \begin_layout Labeling
14403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14424 arg "font-size tiny"
14430 \begin_layout Labeling
14431 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14452 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14458 \begin_layout Labeling
14459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14480 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14486 \begin_layout Labeling
14487 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14508 arg "font-size small"
14514 \begin_layout Labeling
14515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14529 It's also the default size.
14533 arg "font-size normal"
14539 \begin_layout Labeling
14540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14561 arg "font-size large"
14567 \begin_layout Labeling
14568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14589 arg "font-size larger"
14595 \begin_layout Labeling
14596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14617 arg "font-size largest"
14623 \begin_layout Labeling
14624 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14645 arg "font-size huge"
14651 \begin_layout Labeling
14652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14673 arg "font-size giant"
14679 \begin_layout Labeling
14680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14685 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14705 arg "font-size increase"
14711 \begin_layout Labeling
14712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14717 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14737 arg "font-size decrease"
14744 \begin_layout Standard
14749 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14750 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14752 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14753 — use those instead.
14754 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14757 \begin_layout Labeling
14758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14763 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14765 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14772 \begin_layout Labeling
14773 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14780 This is text with emphasize on
14783 This might seem like the same as
14787 , but it is actually a bit different.
14793 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14795 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14798 \begin_layout Labeling
14799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14806 This is text with Underbar on.
14812 arg "font-underline"
14818 \begin_inset Newline newline
14823 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14824 when you could not change fonts.
14825 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14826 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14827 because some people
14831 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14834 \begin_layout Labeling
14835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14839 \begin_inset space ~
14846 This is text with Double underbar on.
14852 arg "font-underunderline"
14856 \begin_inset Newline newline
14859 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14860 about double underbar.
14863 \begin_layout Labeling
14864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14875 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14881 arg "font-underwave"
14885 \begin_inset Newline newline
14888 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14889 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14892 \begin_layout Labeling
14893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14900 This is text with Strikeout on.
14906 arg "font-strikeout"
14910 \begin_inset Newline newline
14913 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14914 changed in the meantime.
14917 \begin_layout Labeling
14918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14925 This is text with Noun on.
14932 , this is a logical attribute.
14933 Normally it's equivalent to
14936 \begin_inset space ~
14945 \begin_layout Standard
14946 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14947 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14949 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14954 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14960 arg "dialog-show character"
14963 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14964 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14967 arg "textstyle-apply"
14971 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14975 \begin_layout Standard
14976 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14983 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14984 (suppose you just set the shape to
14985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15003 \begin_inset space ~
15015 \begin_layout Standard
15016 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
15024 \begin_inset space ~
15036 \begin_layout Itemize
15042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15049 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15067 \begin_inset Newline newline
15071 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15085 \begin_inset Note Note
15088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15089 For more on phantoms see section
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15096 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15106 \begin_inset Newline newline
15112 \begin_layout Itemize
15117 fonts use characters with serifs.
15118 These are the small
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15127 The following example shows the difference:
15128 \begin_inset Newline newline
15132 \begin_inset Newline newline
15137 text without serifs
15140 \begin_inset Newline newline
15143 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15144 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15151 \begin_layout Itemize
15156 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15157 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15158 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15161 \begin_layout Standard
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15169 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15170 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15173 \begin_inset space ~
15178 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15179 the property to be removed.
15180 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15181 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15182 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15200 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15201 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15209 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15213 \begin_inset space ~
15218 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15229 If you, for example, set
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15248 \begin_inset space ~
15253 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15262 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15265 \begin_layout Standard
15266 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15267 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15270 \begin_layout Section
15271 Printing and Previewing
15274 \begin_layout Subsection
15278 \begin_layout Standard
15279 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15280 using \SpecialChar LyX
15281 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15282 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15283 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15284 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15286 Additional Features
15291 \begin_layout Standard
15293 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15296 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15297 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15298 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15301 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15302 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15303 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15304 to turn your writing into printable output.
15305 This happens in two stages:
15308 \begin_layout Enumerate
15309 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15310 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15312 a file with the extension,
15313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15327 \begin_layout Enumerate
15328 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15329 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15330 to use the commands in the
15334 file to produce printable output.
15337 \begin_layout Subsection
15338 Output file formats
15339 \begin_inset Index idx
15342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15351 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15359 Simple text (ASCII)
15360 \begin_inset Index idx
15363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15364 File formats ! ASCII
15372 \begin_layout Standard
15373 This file type has the extension
15374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15386 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15390 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15397 \begin_layout Standard
15398 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15400 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15401 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15403 \begin_inset space ~
15409 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15410 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15411 bibliography (section
15412 \begin_inset space ~
15416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15418 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15423 If your document includes such material, use
15425 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15426 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \begin_inset space ~
15436 \begin_inset space ~
15444 \begin_inset space ~
15448 \begin_inset space ~
15454 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15455 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15461 \begin_inset Index idx
15464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15465 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15474 \begin_layout Standard
15475 This file type has the extension
15476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15487 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15490 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15491 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15492 -Errors or to process it manually
15493 with console commands.
15494 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15495 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15496 's temporary directory whenever you
15497 view or export your document.
15500 \begin_layout Standard
15501 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15502 -file using the menu
15504 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15505 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15520 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15521 export variants are explained in section
15522 \begin_inset space ~
15526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15528 reference "subsec:Export"
15535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15537 \begin_inset Index idx
15540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15549 \begin_layout Standard
15550 This file type has the extension
15551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15572 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15573 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15577 \begin_layout Standard
15578 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15579 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15580 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15581 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15582 when you view the DVI.
15583 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15586 \begin_layout Standard
15587 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15589 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15590 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15595 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15596 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15598 \begin_inset space ~
15605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15615 The latter option uses the program
15617 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15623 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15626 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15627 font access (see section
15628 \begin_inset space ~
15632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15634 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15639 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15640 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15645 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15647 \begin_inset Index idx
15650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15651 File formats ! PostScript
15659 \begin_layout Standard
15660 This file type has the extension
15661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15673 PostScript was developed by the company
15677 as a printer language.
15678 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15680 PostScript can be seen as a
15681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15684 programming language
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15688 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15693 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15700 \begin_inset Index idx
15703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15705 -packages ! pstricks
15715 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15719 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Encapsulated PostScript
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 (EPS, file extension
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 As \SpecialChar LyX
15741 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15742 convert them in the background to EPS.
15743 If, for example, you have 50
15744 \begin_inset space ~
15747 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15752 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15753 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15755 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15756 EPS to avoid this problem.
15759 \begin_layout Standard
15760 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15762 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15763 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15771 \begin_inset Index idx
15774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15781 \begin_inset Index idx
15784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15793 \begin_layout Standard
15794 This file type has the extension
15795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15811 Portable Document Format
15812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15819 was derived from PostScript.
15820 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15829 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15830 looks exactly the same.
15833 \begin_layout Standard
15834 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15838 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15842 (JPG, file extension
15843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15870 Portable Network Graphics
15871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15874 (PNG, file extension
15875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15887 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15888 converts them in the
15889 background to one of these formats.
15890 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15891 will slow down your workflow.
15892 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15895 \begin_layout Standard
15896 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15898 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15904 \begin_layout Description
15906 \begin_inset space ~
15909 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15913 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15916 \begin_layout Description
15918 \begin_inset space ~
15925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15932 X) This uses the program
15934 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15937 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15940 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15943 is a new engine, derived from
15947 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15948 access (see section
15949 \begin_inset space ~
15953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15955 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15960 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15961 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15966 \begin_layout Description
15968 \begin_inset space ~
15975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15982 X) This uses the program
15987 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15993 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15994 font access (see section
15995 \begin_inset space ~
15999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16001 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16006 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16007 vertically written Japanese.
16010 \begin_layout Description
16012 \begin_inset space ~
16015 (cropped) This is the same as
16018 \begin_inset space ~
16023 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16024 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16025 to generate good-looking
16026 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16029 \begin_layout Description
16031 \begin_inset space ~
16034 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16038 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16042 \begin_layout Description
16044 \begin_inset space ~
16047 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16051 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16052 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16056 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16057 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16060 \begin_layout Standard
16064 \begin_inset space ~
16073 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16074 works without problems.
16075 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16076 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16080 \begin_inset space ~
16087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16099 \begin_inset space ~
16106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16115 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16125 \begin_inset Index idx
16128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 FileFormats ! XHTML
16135 \begin_inset Index idx
16138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16147 \begin_layout Standard
16148 This file type has the extension
16149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16161 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16162 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16163 When \SpecialChar LyX
16164 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16165 suitable for the purpose.
16166 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16169 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16172 between different formats, which are described in section
16174 Math Output in XHTML
16179 \begin_inset space ~
16187 \begin_layout Standard
16188 XHTML output remains
16189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16196 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16197 features are supported yet.
16201 and the World Wide Web
16205 Additional Features
16207 manual, for more information.
16210 \begin_layout Standard
16211 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16213 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16214 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16221 \begin_layout Subsection
16223 \begin_inset Index idx
16226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16235 \begin_layout Standard
16236 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16237 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16246 or use the toolbar button
16253 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16254 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16261 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16265 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16273 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16278 Further output formats can be selected via
16280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16281 View (Other Formats)
16283 or the toolbar button
16284 \begin_inset Graphics
16285 filename ../images/view-others.png
16287 groupId toolbarbuttons
16294 \begin_layout Standard
16295 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16296 viewer window using the menu
16298 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16304 Update (Other Formats)
16309 \begin_layout Standard
16310 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16313 To have a real output, export your document.
16316 \begin_layout Section
16317 A few Words about Typography
16318 \begin_inset Index idx
16321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16330 \begin_layout Subsection
16331 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16332 \begin_inset Index idx
16335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16342 \begin_inset Index idx
16345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16354 \begin_layout Standard
16355 In \SpecialChar LyX
16357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16368 character comes in four lengths: the
16380 , and the minus sign:
16381 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16387 \begin_layout Standard
16388 \begin_inset Tabular
16389 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16390 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16391 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16392 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16393 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16394 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16423 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16490 \begin_inset space ~
16493 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16500 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16527 \begin_inset space ~
16530 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16551 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16585 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16591 \begin_layout Standard
16592 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16604 character multiple times in a row.
16605 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16606 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16639 \begin_layout Standard
16640 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16641 math mode and has a length of its own.
16642 Here are some examples:
16645 \begin_layout Enumerate
16646 line- and page-breaks
16647 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16657 \begin_layout Enumerate
16659 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16669 \begin_layout Enumerate
16670 Oh — there's a dash.
16671 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16681 \begin_layout Enumerate
16682 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16686 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16696 \begin_layout Subsection
16698 \begin_inset Index idx
16701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16710 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16717 \begin_layout Standard
16718 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16719 but automatically in the output.
16720 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16726 \begin_inset Index idx
16729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16736 following the rules of the document language.
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16741 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16745 font and with unusual constructs, like
16746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16754 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16755 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16756 This is done with the menu
16758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16759 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16761 \begin_inset space ~
16767 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16769 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16773 \begin_layout Standard
16774 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16775 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16786 would then see the hyphen
16787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16794 as a hyphenation possibility.
16795 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16796 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16797 as described in section
16798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16801 Prevent Hyphenation
16802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16808 \begin_inset space ~
16816 \begin_layout Subsection
16818 \begin_inset Index idx
16821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16831 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16834 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16841 \begin_layout Standard
16842 When \SpecialChar LyX
16843 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16844 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16846 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16852 appropriate amount of space.
16853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16856 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16858 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16859 gets after another word.
16862 \begin_layout Standard
16863 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16864 not work in all cases.
16866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16877 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16878 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16881 \begin_layout Standard
16882 Here are some examples of
16886 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16889 \begin_layout Itemize
16894 \begin_layout Itemize
16899 \begin_layout Standard
16900 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16903 \begin_layout Itemize
16905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16909 this is too much space!
16912 \begin_layout Itemize
16917 \begin_layout Standard
16918 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16921 \begin_layout Standard
16922 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16925 \begin_layout Enumerate
16929 \begin_inset space ~
16934 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16935 \begin_inset space ~
16939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16941 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16946 \begin_inset Index idx
16949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16950 Spaces ! inter-word
16958 \begin_layout Enumerate
16962 \begin_inset space ~
16967 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16968 \begin_inset space ~
16972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16974 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16979 \begin_inset Index idx
16982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16991 \begin_layout Enumerate
16995 \begin_inset space ~
16999 \begin_inset space ~
17003 \begin_inset space ~
17010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17012 \begin_inset space ~
17017 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17018 This function is also bound to
17021 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17027 \begin_layout Standard
17028 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17031 \begin_layout Itemize
17033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17037 \begin_inset space \space{}
17040 this is too much space!
17043 \begin_layout Itemize
17044 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17048 \begin_layout Standard
17049 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17050 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17052 will take care of this.
17055 \begin_layout Standard
17056 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17060 \begin_inset space ~
17066 feature described in the section
17068 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17073 Additional Features
17078 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17080 \begin_inset Index idx
17083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17084 Typography ! Quotes
17090 \begin_inset Index idx
17093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17124 \begin_layout Standard
17126 usually sets quotes correctly.
17127 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
17128 and use a closing quote at the end.
17130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17138 The keyboard character,
17142 , generates this automatically.
17145 \begin_layout Standard
17146 You can specify what character the
17150 key produces using the submenu
17156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17160 \begin_inset Index idx
17163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17164 Document ! Settings
17174 There are six choices:
17177 \begin_layout Labeling
17178 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17201 \begin_layout Labeling
17202 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17205 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17209 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17215 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17219 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17225 \begin_layout Labeling
17226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17229 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17233 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17239 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17243 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17249 \begin_layout Labeling
17250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17253 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17257 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17263 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17267 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17273 \begin_layout Labeling
17274 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17277 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17281 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17287 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17291 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17297 \begin_layout Labeling
17298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17301 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17305 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17311 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17315 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17321 \begin_layout Standard
17322 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17325 arg "quote-insert single"
17331 \begin_layout Subsection
17333 \begin_inset Index idx
17336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17337 Typography ! Ligatures
17343 \begin_inset Index idx
17346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17377 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17384 \begin_layout Standard
17385 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17386 print them as single characters.
17387 These groups are known as
17392 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17393 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17395 Here are the standard ligatures:
17398 \begin_layout Itemize
17402 \begin_layout Itemize
17406 \begin_layout Itemize
17410 \begin_layout Itemize
17414 \begin_layout Itemize
17418 \begin_layout Standard
17419 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17422 \begin_layout Standard
17423 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17424 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17432 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17448 To break a ligature, use
17450 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17451 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17453 \begin_inset space ~
17460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17471 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17488 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17496 \begin_layout Subsection
17499 \begin_inset Index idx
17502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17512 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17519 \begin_layout Standard
17520 You will certainly have noticed that the word “\SpecialChar LaTeX
17521 ” always appears with characters
17522 in different sizes and positions.
17524 is the name of the program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17525 and is therefore recognized as a proper
17526 name when you type it in \SpecialChar LyX
17528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17547 \begin_inset Note Note
17550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17551 The braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17552 Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper name
17553 in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17558 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! \SpecialChar LyX
17559 recognizes the following
17563 \begin_layout Description
17565 The name of the game, write
17566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17587 \begin_layout Description
17589 The program used by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17612 \begin_layout Description
17614 The program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17637 \begin_layout Description
17638 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17639 The actual version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17662 \begin_layout Standard
17663 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17669 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17677 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17678 -world to give programs geek version numbers.
17679 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17680 converges to the number
17681 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17684 : The actual version is
17685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17693 , the previous one was
17694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17705 \begin_layout Standard
17706 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17707 you can insert two empty braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17709 In \SpecialChar LyX
17710 this will look like
17711 \begin_inset Graphics
17712 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17718 \begin_inset Newline newline
17721 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17729 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17736 \begin_layout Subsection
17738 \begin_inset Index idx
17741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17750 \begin_layout Standard
17751 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17752 space between two words.
17753 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17763 for units use the menu
17765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17768 \begin_inset space ~
17776 arg "space-insert thin"
17782 \begin_layout Standard
17783 Here is an example to show the differences:
17786 \begin_layout Standard
17787 \begin_inset Tabular
17788 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17789 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17790 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17791 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17798 \begin_inset space ~
17802 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17814 space between number and unit
17821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17830 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17842 half space between number and unit
17855 \begin_layout Subsection
17857 \begin_inset Index idx
17860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17861 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17869 \begin_layout Standard
17870 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17872 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17873 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17874 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17875 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17876 These bits of text became known as
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17888 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17889 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17890 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17891 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17892 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17893 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17894 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17895 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17896 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17897 \begin_inset Newline newline
17905 \begin_inset Newline newline
17913 \begin_inset Newline newline
17916 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17917 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17918 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17920 \begin_inset space ~
17924 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17926 key "latexcompanion"
17931 \begin_inset space ~
17935 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17941 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17942 's page break mechanism.
17945 \begin_layout Chapter
17946 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17949 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17956 \begin_layout Standard
17957 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17960 \begin_inset space ~
17966 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17969 \begin_layout Section
17971 \begin_inset Index idx
17974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17990 \begin_layout Standard
17992 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17995 \begin_layout Description
17998 \begin_inset space ~
18001 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18002 \begin_inset Newline newline
18006 \begin_inset Note Note
18009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18010 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18018 \begin_layout Description
18019 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18020 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18021 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18024 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18025 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18038 \begin_inset space ~
18044 \begin_inset Newline newline
18048 \begin_inset Note Comment
18051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18052 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18061 \begin_layout Description
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18066 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18067 set in the document settings under
18069 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18071 \begin_inset space ~
18077 \begin_inset Newline newline
18081 \begin_inset Newline newline
18085 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18094 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18095 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18100 of a comment that appears in the output.
18106 \begin_inset Newline newline
18110 \begin_inset Newline newline
18113 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18116 \begin_layout Standard
18117 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18129 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18132 \begin_layout Section
18134 \begin_inset Index idx
18137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18146 name "sec:Footnotes"
18153 \begin_layout Standard
18155 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18161 or the toolbar button
18164 arg "footnote-insert"
18176 \begin_inset Graphics
18177 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
18186 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18187 's representation of your footnote.
18197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18216 label, the box will
18220 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18221 Clicking on the box label again will close
18234 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18235 and click on the footnote
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18251 Here is an example footnote:
18259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18260 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18268 \begin_layout Standard
18269 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18270 position where the footnote box is placed.
18271 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18272 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18273 according to the document class.
18275 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18276 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18282 ey are described in the
18285 \begin_inset space ~
18293 \begin_layout Section
18295 \begin_inset Index idx
18298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18307 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18314 \begin_layout Standard
18315 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18317 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18319 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18321 \begin_inset space ~
18326 or the toolbar button
18329 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18355 appearing within your text.
18356 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18357 's representation of your margin
18366 \begin_layout Standard
18367 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18371 \begin_inset Marginal
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18376 This is a marginal note.
18384 \begin_layout Standard
18385 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18386 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18387 pages, right on odd pages.
18390 \begin_layout Standard
18391 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18394 \begin_inset space ~
18402 \begin_inset space ~
18410 \begin_layout Section
18411 Graphics and Images
18412 \begin_inset Index idx
18415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18422 \begin_inset Index idx
18425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18434 name "sec:Graphics"
18441 \begin_layout Standard
18442 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18443 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18446 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18455 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18458 \begin_layout Standard
18459 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18464 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18465 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18467 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18468 \begin_inset space ~
18472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18474 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18481 \begin_layout Standard
18486 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18487 of the image in the output.
18488 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18492 \begin_inset space ~
18496 \begin_inset space ~
18505 \begin_inset space ~
18509 \begin_inset space ~
18513 \begin_inset space ~
18518 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18519 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18527 \begin_layout Standard
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18542 \begin_inset space ~
18546 \begin_inset space ~
18553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18562 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18563 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18565 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18570 \begin_inset space ~
18575 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18576 with the image size is printed.
18580 \begin_inset space ~
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18588 \begin_inset space ~
18593 is explained in the
18596 \begin_inset space ~
18608 \begin_layout Standard
18609 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18610 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18612 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18613 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18619 \begin_layout Standard
18621 \begin_inset Graphics
18622 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18630 \begin_layout Standard
18631 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18632 the image into a float, see section
18633 \begin_inset space ~
18637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18639 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18646 \begin_layout Subsection
18648 \begin_inset Index idx
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18660 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18667 \begin_layout Standard
18668 You can insert images in any known file format.
18669 But as we explained in section
18670 \begin_inset space ~
18674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18676 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18680 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18682 therefore uses the program
18686 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18687 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18688 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18689 \begin_inset space ~
18693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18695 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18702 \begin_layout Standard
18703 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18706 \begin_layout Description
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18711 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18712 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18713 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18717 Graphics Interchange Format
18718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18721 (GIF, file extension
18722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18734 \begin_inset Index idx
18737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18769 Portable Network Graphics
18770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18773 (PNG, file extension
18774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18786 \begin_inset Index idx
18789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18821 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18825 (JPG, file extension
18826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18850 \begin_inset Index idx
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18884 \begin_layout Description
18886 \begin_inset space ~
18889 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18891 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18892 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18893 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18894 \begin_inset Newline newline
18897 Scalable image formats can be
18898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18901 Scalable Vector Graphics
18902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18905 (SVG, file extension
18906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18918 \begin_inset Index idx
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18953 Encapsulated PostScript
18954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18957 (EPS, file extension
18958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18970 \begin_inset Index idx
18973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19005 Portable Document Format
19006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19009 (PDF, file extension
19010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19022 \begin_inset Index idx
19025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19040 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19041 result will not be scalable.
19042 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19056 \begin_layout Standard
19057 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19064 \begin_layout Subsection
19065 Grouping of Image Settings
19066 \begin_inset Index idx
19069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19070 Images ! Settings grouping
19078 \begin_layout Standard
19079 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19081 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19082 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19084 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19085 need to manually change each of them.
19089 \begin_layout Standard
19090 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19093 \begin_inset space ~
19097 \begin_inset space ~
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19120 \begin_inset space ~
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19141 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19142 and checking the name of the desired group.
19145 \begin_layout Section
19147 \begin_inset Index idx
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19166 \begin_layout Standard
19167 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19170 arg "tabular-insert"
19175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19179 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19180 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19181 from the rest of the table.
19182 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19183 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19185 Here is an example table:
19186 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19192 \begin_layout Standard
19194 \begin_inset Tabular
19195 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19196 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19198 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19400 \begin_layout Subsection
19404 \begin_layout Standard
19405 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19408 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19412 This brings up the table dialog.
19413 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19414 cursor is placed currently.
19415 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19416 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19417 done on all of your selection.
19420 \begin_layout Standard
19421 In addition to the table dialog, the
19424 \begin_inset space ~
19429 helps you in setting table properties.
19430 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19433 \begin_layout Standard
19437 \begin_inset space ~
19442 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19443 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19444 current cell respectively.
19445 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19447 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19448 of text, see section
19449 \begin_inset space ~
19453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19455 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19462 \begin_layout Standard
19463 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19464 using the check box
19473 This will merge the cells to
19477 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19478 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19479 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19480 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19481 in the last row without the upper border:
19482 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19488 \begin_layout Standard
19490 \begin_inset Tabular
19491 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19492 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19493 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19494 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19496 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19507 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 \begin_layout Standard
19628 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19629 -arguments for the table.
19630 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19631 explained in the chapter
19638 \begin_inset space ~
19644 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19645 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19646 but are visible in the output.
19649 \begin_layout Standard
19650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 Most DVI-viewers are
19662 able to display rotations.
19670 \begin_layout Standard
19675 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19680 adds lines for all cell borders.
19683 \begin_layout Subsection
19685 \begin_inset Index idx
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 Tables ! Longtables
19695 \begin_inset Index idx
19698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 \begin_layout Standard
19708 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19711 \begin_inset space ~
19715 \begin_inset space ~
19724 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19725 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19728 \begin_layout Description
19733 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19734 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19735 except for the first page, if
19738 \begin_inset space ~
19746 \begin_layout Description
19750 \begin_inset space ~
19755 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19756 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19759 \begin_layout Description
19764 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19765 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19766 except for the last page, if
19769 \begin_inset space ~
19777 \begin_layout Description
19781 \begin_inset space ~
19786 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19787 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19790 \begin_layout Description
19791 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19792 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19798 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19801 \begin_inset space ~
19809 \begin_layout Standard
19810 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19811 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19812 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19818 In this context, first means first in this order:
19821 \begin_inset space ~
19833 \begin_inset space ~
19838 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19839 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19845 \begin_layout Standard
19847 \begin_inset Tabular
19848 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19849 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19850 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19851 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19852 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19853 <row endfirsthead="true">
19854 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19865 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19884 <row endfirsthead="true">
19885 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <row endhead="true">
19918 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19929 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <row endhead="true">
19949 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19960 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19969 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 <row endfoot="true">
19982 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <row endlastfoot="true">
21964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21975 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 \begin_layout Subsection
22003 \begin_inset Index idx
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22015 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22022 \begin_layout Standard
22023 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22024 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22025 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22026 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22030 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22033 \begin_layout Standard
22034 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22035 for the column in the table dialog.
22036 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22037 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22039 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
22045 \begin_layout Standard
22047 \begin_inset Tabular
22048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22051 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22052 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22141 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 This is longer now.
22202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22253 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22254 This is longer now.
22259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22285 \begin_layout Standard
22286 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22287 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22293 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22299 Selection with the mouse or with
22303 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22304 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22305 the selection from outside the table.
22308 \begin_layout Section
22310 \begin_inset Index idx
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22329 \begin_layout Subsection
22333 \begin_layout Standard
22334 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22335 have a fixed location.
22337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22344 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22352 \begin_inset space ~
22357 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22358 too many notes on the current page.
22361 \begin_layout Standard
22362 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22363 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22364 and pages without text.
22365 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22366 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22367 Floats are therefore numbered.
22368 Referencing is described in section
22369 \begin_inset space ~
22373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22375 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22382 \begin_layout Standard
22383 To insert a float, use the menu
22385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22389 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22390 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22392 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22393 \begin_inset Index idx
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22403 paragraph within the float.
22404 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22405 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22406 left-clicking on the box label.
22407 A closed float box looks like this:
22408 \begin_inset Graphics
22409 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
22414 – a gray button with a red label.
22417 \begin_layout Standard
22418 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22420 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22423 \begin_layout Subsection
22425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22427 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22432 \begin_inset Index idx
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22436 Floats ! Figure floats
22444 \begin_layout Standard
22446 \begin_inset space ~
22450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22452 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22456 was created using the menu
22458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22459 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22465 arg "float-insert figure"
22469 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22478 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22482 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22483 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22487 \begin_inset space ~
22495 arg "layout-paragraph"
22501 \begin_layout Standard
22502 \begin_inset Float figure
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 \begin_inset Graphics
22510 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22525 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22529 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22542 \begin_layout Standard
22543 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22544 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22555 ) and refer to it using the menu
22557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22563 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22567 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22568 vague references like
22569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22576 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22577 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22587 For more about cross-references, see section
22588 \begin_inset space ~
22592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22594 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22601 \begin_layout Standard
22602 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22603 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22604 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22605 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22606 as described in section
22607 \begin_inset space ~
22611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22613 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22619 \begin_inset space ~
22623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22625 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22629 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22630 You can also set the images one below the other.
22632 \begin_inset space ~
22636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22638 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22645 reference "fig:Platypus"
22649 are the subfigures.
22652 \begin_layout Standard
22653 \begin_inset Float figure
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22663 \begin_inset Float figure
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22674 name "fig:Undefinable"
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22687 \begin_inset Graphics
22688 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22699 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22703 \begin_inset Float figure
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22709 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22714 name "fig:Platypus"
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 \begin_inset Graphics
22728 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22740 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22747 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22752 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22756 Two distorted images.
22769 \begin_layout Subsection
22771 \begin_inset Index idx
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 Floats ! Table floats
22783 \begin_layout Standard
22784 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22787 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22790 or the toolbar button
22793 arg "float-insert table"
22797 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22798 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22799 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22801 \begin_inset space ~
22805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22807 reference "tab:Table-float"
22814 \begin_layout Standard
22815 \begin_inset Float table
22820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22826 name "tab:Table-float"
22838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22840 \begin_inset Tabular
22841 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22842 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22843 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22844 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22845 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22972 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22996 \end{array}\right]$
23004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23038 \begin_layout Subsection
23040 \begin_inset Index idx
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 \begin_layout Standard
23054 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23055 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23056 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23058 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23066 \begin_inset space ~
23074 \begin_layout Section
23076 \begin_inset Index idx
23079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23088 \begin_layout Standard
23090 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23092 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23093 \begin_inset space \space{}
23100 \begin_layout Standard
23101 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23102 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23108 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23109 and its alignment within the page.
23110 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
23116 \begin_layout Standard
23118 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23128 height_special "totalheight"
23133 backgroundcolor "none"
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 This is a minipage.
23140 The text is set in an italic style.
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23146 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23147 another formatting.
23155 \begin_layout Standard
23156 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23159 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23163 as described in section
23164 \begin_inset space ~
23168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23170 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23175 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23181 \begin_layout Standard
23182 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23192 height_special "totalheight"
23197 backgroundcolor "none"
23200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23201 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23202 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23208 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23212 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23222 height_special "totalheight"
23227 backgroundcolor "none"
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23231 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23232 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23240 \begin_layout Standard
23241 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23247 \begin_layout Standard
23248 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23250 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23257 \begin_inset space ~
23265 \begin_layout Chapter
23266 Mathematical Formulas
23267 \begin_inset Index idx
23270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 \begin_inset Index idx
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23311 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23318 \begin_layout Standard
23319 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23324 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23327 \begin_layout Section
23329 \begin_inset Index idx
23332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 \begin_layout Standard
23342 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23355 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23357 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23358 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23359 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23367 \begin_layout Standard
23368 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23372 \begin_inset space ~
23377 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23380 \begin_layout Standard
23381 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23382 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23385 \begin_layout Standard
23386 This is a line with an inline formula
23387 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23393 \begin_layout Standard
23394 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23395 paragraph, like this one:
23396 \begin_inset Formula
23403 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23406 \begin_layout Standard
23408 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23410 For example, typing
23411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23424 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23425 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23429 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23432 \begin_inset space ~
23440 \begin_layout Subsection
23441 Navigating in Formulas
23442 \begin_inset Index idx
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_layout Standard
23455 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23456 achieved with the arrow keys.
23458 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23459 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23464 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23465 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23469 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23473 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23476 \end{array}\right]$
23484 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23489 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23490 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23493 \begin_layout Standard
23498 , printed in this document as
23499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23503 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23510 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23511 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23512 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23517 For example, if you want
23518 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23526 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23536 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23540 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23545 , since in the latter case only the
23548 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23553 will be under the square root sign:
23554 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23560 \begin_layout Standard
23561 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23563 \begin_inset Formula
23565 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23574 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23575 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23578 \begin_layout Subsection
23582 \begin_layout Standard
23583 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23584 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23588 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23589 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23590 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23591 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23592 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23596 \begin_layout Subsection
23597 Exponents and Subscripts
23598 \begin_inset Index idx
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23608 \begin_inset Index idx
23611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23620 \begin_layout Standard
23621 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23624 arg "math-superscript"
23630 arg "math-subscript"
23633 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23635 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23638 , type in a formula
23641 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23651 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23657 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23661 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23667 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23673 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23682 , you have to use an extra
23686 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23687 For example, if you want
23688 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23694 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23700 Subscripts are similar: To get
23701 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23707 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23715 \begin_layout Subsection
23717 \begin_inset Index idx
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 \begin_layout Standard
23730 Create a fraction either with the command
23736 or by using the icon
23739 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23745 \begin_inset space ~
23751 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23752 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23753 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23758 To move back up, press
23763 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23764 \begin_inset Formula
23766 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23769 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23777 \begin_layout Subsection
23779 \begin_inset Index idx
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 \begin_layout Standard
23792 Roots can be created using the
23795 \begin_inset space ~
23803 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23809 arg "math-insert \\root"
23831 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23837 always produces a square root.
23840 \begin_layout Subsection
23841 Operators with Limits
23842 \begin_inset Index idx
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23852 \begin_inset Index idx
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23864 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23871 \begin_layout Standard
23873 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23877 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23880 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23881 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23882 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23883 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23884 The sum operator will automatically place its
23885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23892 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23894 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23898 \begin_inset Formula
23900 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23905 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23909 \begin_layout Standard
23910 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23912 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23913 behind the operator and using the menu
23915 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23916 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23918 \begin_inset space ~
23922 \begin_inset space ~
23936 \begin_layout Standard
23937 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23946 \begin_inset Index idx
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 \begin_inset Formula
23958 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23963 which will place the
23964 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23976 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23977 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23983 \begin_layout Standard
23984 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23991 Have a look at section
23992 \begin_inset space ~
23996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23998 reference "subsec:Functions"
24002 for an explanation of function macros.
24005 \begin_layout Subsection
24007 \begin_inset Index idx
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24019 \begin_layout Standard
24020 Most math symbols can be found in the
24023 \begin_inset space ~
24028 under one of several categories; including
24045 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24049 \begin_layout Standard
24050 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24051 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24052 don't have to use the
24055 \begin_inset space ~
24060 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24062 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24065 \begin_layout Subsection
24067 \begin_inset Index idx
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 \begin_layout Standard
24080 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24086 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24092 \begin_inset space ~
24100 arg "math-insert \\space"
24104 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24105 For example, the sequence
24110 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24113 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24115 \begin_inset Graphics
24116 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24121 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24122 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24123 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24124 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24125 , because they are negative
24127 Here are two examples:
24130 \begin_layout Standard
24140 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24146 \begin_layout Standard
24156 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24162 \begin_layout Subsection
24164 \begin_inset Index idx
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24176 name "subsec:Functions"
24183 \begin_layout Standard
24187 \begin_inset space ~
24192 contains under the button
24195 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24198 a number of function macros, such as
24199 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24203 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24211 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24218 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24219 avoid confusions, because
24220 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24224 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24230 \begin_layout Standard
24231 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24233 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24237 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24243 \begin_layout Standard
24244 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24245 are placed, as described in section
24246 \begin_inset space ~
24250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24252 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24259 \begin_layout Subsection
24261 \begin_inset Index idx
24264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24273 \begin_layout Standard
24274 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24276 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24277 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24278 commands, for example, to enter
24279 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24282 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24283 Our example is entered by typing
24288 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24295 \begin_inset space ~
24299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24301 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24305 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24308 \begin_layout Standard
24309 \begin_inset Float table
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24315 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24320 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24324 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset Tabular
24335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24336 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24423 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24531 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24693 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24921 \begin_layout Standard
24922 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24925 \begin_inset space ~
24933 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24936 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24940 \begin_layout Section
24941 Brackets and Delimiters
24942 \begin_inset Index idx
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 \begin_inset Index idx
24955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24964 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24971 \begin_layout Standard
24972 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24974 For some purposes, using just the keys
24979 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24980 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24981 toolbar delimiter icon
24984 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24988 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24989 \begin_inset Formula
24991 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24999 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25000 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25004 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25007 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25013 \begin_inset Formula
25015 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25023 \begin_layout Standard
25024 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25025 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25029 \begin_layout Standard
25030 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25031 left side and right side.
25032 If you use the option
25035 \begin_inset space ~
25040 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25041 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25043 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25048 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25049 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25052 \begin_layout Standard
25053 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25054 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25055 is to go inside the brackets.
25056 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25061 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25062 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25063 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25067 arg "math-delim ( )"
25073 \begin_layout Section
25074 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25075 \begin_inset Index idx
25078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25085 \begin_inset Index idx
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 \begin_inset Index idx
25098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25107 \begin_layout Standard
25108 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25112 \begin_inset space ~
25120 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25124 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25125 Here is an example:
25126 \begin_inset Formula
25128 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25137 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25138 \begin_inset space ~
25142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25144 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25149 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25150 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25151 This alignment is set in the box
25156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25205 for every column as default.
25206 For example, the sequence
25207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25218 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25219 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25220 corresponds to the relevant column.
25221 The result will look like this:
25222 \begin_inset Formula
25225 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25226 column & has & has\,right\\
25227 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25236 \begin_layout Standard
25237 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25240 arg "newline-insert newline"
25243 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25244 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25246 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25249 or the math toolbar.
25252 \begin_layout Standard
25253 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25254 It can be created with the menu
25256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25257 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25259 \begin_inset space ~
25271 Here is an example:
25272 \begin_inset Formula
25286 \begin_layout Standard
25287 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25290 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25293 arg "newline-insert newline"
25297 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25302 arg "newline-insert newline"
25305 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25313 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25314 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25315 A new row is created by every further entry of
25318 arg "newline-insert newline"
25322 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25323 Here is an example:
25324 \begin_inset Formula
25326 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25327 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25332 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25333 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25334 \begin_inset Formula
25336 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25344 \begin_layout Standard
25345 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25352 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25353 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25356 reference "eq:asquared"
25361 The other types are described in section
25362 \begin_inset space ~
25366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25368 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25375 \begin_layout Section
25376 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25377 \begin_inset Index idx
25380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 Math ! Formula numbering
25387 \begin_inset Index idx
25390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 Math ! Referencing formulas
25397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25399 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25406 \begin_layout Standard
25407 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25409 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25410 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25412 \begin_inset space ~
25416 \begin_inset space ~
25424 arg "math-number-toggle"
25428 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25429 within parentheses.
25430 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25431 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25432 the document class.
25433 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25434 separated by a dot:
25435 \begin_inset Formula
25445 arg "math-number-toggle"
25448 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25449 You can only number displayed formulas.
25452 \begin_layout Standard
25453 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25456 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25458 \begin_inset space ~
25462 \begin_inset space ~
25470 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25473 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25474 \begin_inset Formula
25477 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25483 To number all lines use the shortcut
25486 arg "math-number-toggle"
25492 \begin_layout Standard
25493 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25496 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25497 A label is inserted with the menu
25499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25508 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25509 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25510 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25522 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25523 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25524 We inserted in the following example the label
25525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25532 in the second line:
25533 \begin_inset Formula
25535 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25536 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25541 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25542 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25543 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25547 \begin_inset space ~
25555 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25559 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25560 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25561 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25562 as the formula number:
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25569 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25576 \begin_layout Standard
25577 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25578 's cross-reference box are described in section
25579 \begin_inset space ~
25583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25585 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25590 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25598 \begin_layout Section
25599 User defined math macros
25600 \begin_inset Index idx
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 \begin_layout Standard
25614 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25615 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25616 Math macros are explained in section
25619 \begin_inset space ~
25631 \begin_layout Section
25635 \begin_layout Subsection
25637 \begin_inset Index idx
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25649 \begin_layout Standard
25650 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25651 To set a font in a formula, use the
25654 \begin_inset space ~
25662 arg "math-insert \\font"
25665 , or enter its command, listed in table
25666 \begin_inset space ~
25670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25672 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25679 \begin_layout Standard
25680 \begin_inset Float table
25685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25686 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25691 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25695 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 \begin_inset Tabular
25706 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25707 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25708 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25709 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25768 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25795 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25855 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25882 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25977 \begin_layout Standard
25978 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25986 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26002 \begin_layout Standard
26003 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26004 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26009 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26010 space when you need a space in the box.
26011 Here is an example where
26012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26023 denotes the set of numbers:
26024 \begin_inset Formula
26026 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26034 \begin_layout Standard
26035 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26036 You can, for example, put a character in
26045 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26049 \begin_inset Newline newline
26052 So it is better not to use this feature.
26055 \begin_layout Standard
26056 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26057 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26061 \begin_inset Newline newline
26064 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26070 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26071 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26077 \begin_layout Standard
26084 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26090 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26091 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26093 \begin_inset space ~
26101 \begin_layout Subsection
26103 \begin_inset Index idx
26106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26115 \begin_layout Standard
26116 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26118 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26122 \begin_inset space ~
26126 \begin_inset space ~
26134 \begin_inset space ~
26142 arg "math-insert \\font"
26146 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26147 in black instead of blue.
26148 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26149 Here is an example:
26150 \begin_inset Formula
26153 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26154 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26163 \begin_layout Subsection
26165 \begin_inset Index idx
26168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26177 \begin_layout Standard
26178 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26179 automatically chosen in most situations.
26197 For most characters,
26205 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26206 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26211 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26212 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26213 thinks are appropriate.
26214 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26217 arg "math-insert \\style"
26221 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26222 For example, you can set
26223 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26226 , which is normally in
26235 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26239 The four styles are used in the following example:
26242 \begin_layout Standard
26243 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26247 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26251 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26255 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26261 \begin_layout Standard
26262 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26263 is set in a particular size with the menu
26265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26267 \begin_inset space ~
26272 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26273 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26274 will be adjusted to correspond.
26275 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26286 \begin_layout Standard
26290 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26296 \begin_layout Section
26297 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26299 \begin_inset Index idx
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26309 \begin_inset Index idx
26312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26321 \begin_layout Standard
26323 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26324 that are in common use.
26327 \begin_layout Subsection
26328 Enabling AMS-Support
26331 \begin_layout Standard
26332 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26333 the document by selecting the checkbox
26336 \begin_inset space ~
26340 \begin_inset space ~
26344 \begin_inset space ~
26351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26355 \begin_inset Index idx
26358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26359 Document ! Settings
26367 \begin_inset space ~
26373 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26374 -errors in formulas,
26375 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26378 \begin_layout Subsection
26380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26382 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26387 \begin_inset Index idx
26390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26391 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26399 \begin_layout Standard
26400 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26401 provides a selection of different formula types.
26403 allows you to choose between
26424 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26425 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26431 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26434 \begin_layout Chapter
26438 \begin_layout Section
26440 \begin_inset Index idx
26443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26452 name "sec:Cross-References"
26459 \begin_layout Standard
26460 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26461 's strengths is cross-references.
26462 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26464 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26465 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26466 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26469 \begin_layout Enumerate
26473 \begin_layout Enumerate
26474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26476 name "enu:Second-item"
26483 \begin_layout Enumerate
26487 \begin_layout Standard
26488 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26493 or by pressing the toolbar button
26500 A gray label box like this:
26501 \begin_inset Graphics
26502 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26507 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26509 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26544 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26545 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26561 \begin_layout Standard
26562 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26567 or the toolbar button
26570 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26574 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26575 \begin_inset Graphics
26576 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26581 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26583 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26596 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26600 \begin_layout Standard
26601 As an alternative to
26603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26606 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26611 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26612 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26626 \begin_layout Standard
26627 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26628 \begin_inset space ~
26632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26634 reference "enu:Second-item"
26641 \begin_layout Standard
26642 It is recommended to use a protected space
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26647 described in section
26648 \begin_inset space ~
26652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26654 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26663 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26664 line breaks between them.
26667 \begin_layout Standard
26668 There are six formats of cross-references:
26671 \begin_layout Description
26672 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26675 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26682 \begin_layout Description
26683 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26684 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26696 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26703 \begin_layout Description
26704 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26705 \begin_inset space ~
26709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26710 LatexCommand pageref
26711 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26718 \begin_layout Description
26720 \begin_inset space ~
26724 \begin_inset space ~
26727 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26729 LatexCommand vpageref
26730 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26735 \begin_inset Newline newline
26738 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26739 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26740 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26741 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26742 it prints “on the next page”.
26743 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26746 \begin_layout Description
26748 \begin_inset space ~
26752 \begin_inset space ~
26756 \begin_inset space ~
26759 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26762 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26767 \begin_inset Newline newline
26770 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26776 ; otherwise it behaves like
26780 \begin_inset space ~
26784 \begin_inset space ~
26793 \begin_layout Description
26795 \begin_inset space ~
26798 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26799 \begin_inset Newline newline
26803 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26811 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26821 \begin_inset Index idx
26824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26826 -packages ! prettyref
26832 \begin_inset Index idx
26835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26837 -packages ! refstyle
26848 \begin_inset Newline newline
26851 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26852 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26855 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26860 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26868 is the default and preferred because
26872 supports only English documents.
26873 The format is specified by using the command
26885 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26886 preamble of the document.
26887 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26900 ) can be done with this command
26901 \begin_inset Newline newline
26908 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26913 \begin_inset Newline newline
26916 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26918 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26920 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26927 \begin_layout Description
26929 \begin_inset space ~
26932 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26934 LatexCommand nameref
26935 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26942 \begin_layout Standard
26943 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26944 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26946 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26950 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26954 \begin_layout Standard
26955 You can only use the style
26959 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26963 is always possible.
26966 \begin_layout Standard
26967 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26968 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26970 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26971 \begin_inset space ~
26975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26977 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26984 \begin_layout Standard
26985 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26989 \begin_inset space ~
26993 \begin_inset space ~
26998 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26999 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27002 \begin_inset space ~
27007 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27008 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27011 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27017 \begin_layout Standard
27018 You can change labels at any time.
27019 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27020 do not need to think about this.
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27024 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27026 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27030 \begin_layout Standard
27031 References are described in detail in the section
27032 \begin_inset space ~
27036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27046 \begin_inset space ~
27054 \begin_layout Section
27055 Table of Contents and other Listings
27056 \begin_inset Index idx
27059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 \begin_inset Index idx
27069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27085 \begin_layout Subsection
27087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27089 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27096 \begin_layout Standard
27097 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27100 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27102 \begin_inset space ~
27106 \begin_inset space ~
27112 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27114 If you click on it, the
27118 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27119 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27120 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27122 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27124 \begin_inset space ~
27129 that is described in section
27130 \begin_inset space ~
27134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27136 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27143 \begin_layout Standard
27144 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27145 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27147 \begin_inset space ~
27151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27153 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27157 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27159 \begin_inset space ~
27163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27165 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27169 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27171 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27174 \begin_layout Subsection
27175 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27178 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27185 \begin_layout Standard
27186 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27188 You can insert them via the
27190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27194 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27197 \begin_layout Section
27198 URLs and Hyperlinks
27199 \begin_inset Index idx
27202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27209 \begin_inset Index idx
27212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27221 \begin_layout Subsection
27223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27232 \begin_layout Standard
27233 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27241 \begin_layout Standard
27242 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27244 \begin_inset Flex URL
27247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 \begin_layout Standard
27258 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27264 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27268 \begin_layout Standard
27269 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27277 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27286 \begin_layout Subsection
27288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27290 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27297 \begin_layout Standard
27298 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27303 or with the toolbar button
27310 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27319 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27320 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27323 name "LyX's homepage"
27324 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27328 , an Email address like this:
27329 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27331 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27332 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27337 , or a link to a file.
27340 \begin_layout Standard
27341 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27354 to the link target.
27357 \begin_layout Standard
27358 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27359 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27360 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27361 the text style dialog.
27362 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27368 name "LyX's homepage"
27369 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27376 \begin_layout Standard
27377 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27381 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27384 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27388 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27390 \begin_inset Newline newline
27398 \begin_inset Newline newline
27405 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27408 \begin_layout Section
27410 \begin_inset Index idx
27413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27422 name "sec:Appendices"
27429 \begin_layout Standard
27430 Appendices are created with the menu
27432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27434 \begin_inset space ~
27438 \begin_inset space ~
27444 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27445 as the appendix part of the book.
27446 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27449 \begin_layout Standard
27450 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27451 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27452 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27453 and the subsection number.
27454 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27458 \begin_layout Standard
27460 \begin_inset space ~
27464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27466 reference "chap:Credits"
27471 \begin_inset space ~
27475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27477 reference "subsec:Export"
27484 \begin_layout Section
27486 \begin_inset Index idx
27489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27498 name "sec:Bibliography"
27505 \begin_layout Standard
27506 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27508 You can include a bibliography database,
27512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27513 Known under the name
27514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27517 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27527 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27528 manually, using the paragraph environment
27532 , which was described in section
27533 \begin_inset space ~
27537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27539 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27544 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27545 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27549 use a bibliography database.
27552 \begin_layout Subsection
27553 The Bibliography Environment
27556 \begin_layout Standard
27561 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27563 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27572 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27574 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27584 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27587 \begin_layout Standard
27588 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27593 or the toolbar button
27596 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27600 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27601 containing the available citations.
27602 Select one or more keys from the list and
27612 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27613 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27617 \begin_layout Standard
27618 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27619 entry with surrounding brackets.
27624 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27625 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27637 \begin_layout Standard
27641 Companion Second Edition
27644 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27646 key "latexcompanion"
27653 \begin_layout Standard
27654 The \SpecialChar LyX
27655 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27656 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27665 \begin_layout Standard
27666 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27669 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27671 \begin_inset space ~
27679 arg "layout-paragraph"
27683 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27686 \begin_layout Subsection
27687 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27689 \begin_inset Index idx
27692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27693 Bibliography ! Databases
27699 \begin_inset Index idx
27702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27703 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27712 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27719 \begin_layout Standard
27720 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27726 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27728 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27729 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27734 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27736 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27737 your working field in a database.
27738 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27739 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27740 list for that document.
27741 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27745 \begin_layout Standard
27746 The database is a text file with the file extension
27747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27758 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27759 The format is explained in
27760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27766 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27770 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27775 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27776 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27777 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27779 \begin_inset Flex URL
27782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27792 \begin_layout Standard
27793 To use a database, use the menu
27795 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27800 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27813 \begin_inset space ~
27819 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27820 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27827 Add bibliography to TOC
27829 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27834 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27835 in the document or just the cited references.
27838 \begin_layout Standard
27839 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27851 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27852 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27853 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27854 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27856 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27862 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27863 \begin_inset Newline newline
27867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27869 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27882 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27885 \begin_layout Standard
27886 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27887 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27889 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27902 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27903 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27904 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27919 The following variants are possible:
27922 \begin_layout Description
27923 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27924 with other bibliography packages (e.
27925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27929 \begin_inset space \space{}
27936 ), only with the package
27940 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27944 \begin_layout Description
27945 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27946 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27947 with all bibliography packages, except
27952 \begin_layout Description
27953 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27958 , works with all bibliography packages
27961 \begin_layout Standard
27962 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27963 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27965 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27968 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27972 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27981 \begin_layout Standard
27982 When you select the option
27984 Sectioned bibliography
27988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27989 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27992 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27993 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27995 Customizing Bibliographies
27999 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28004 Additional Features
28009 \begin_layout Standard
28010 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
28011 the two methods of creating them.
28012 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28013 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28014 We used the style file
28018 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
28021 \begin_layout Subsection
28022 Bibliography layout
28023 \begin_inset Index idx
28026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28027 Bibliography ! Layout
28035 \begin_layout Standard
28036 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
28037 For this feature you need to enable the option
28043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28047 \begin_inset Index idx
28050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28051 Document ! Settings
28061 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
28062 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28063 style files as explained in
28064 the previous section.
28067 \begin_layout Standard
28068 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
28069 the citation reference window.
28070 Here is an example where the text
28071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28075 \begin_inset space ~
28079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28082 appears after the reference:
28085 \begin_layout Standard
28087 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28090 key "latexcompanion"
28097 \begin_layout Section
28099 \begin_inset Index idx
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28118 \begin_layout Standard
28119 An index entry is created if you use the menu
28121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28123 \begin_inset space ~
28128 or the toolbar button
28135 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
28136 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
28137 by \SpecialChar LyX
28138 as the index entry.
28141 \begin_layout Standard
28142 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
28144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28145 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28147 \begin_inset space ~
28153 A light blue box labeled
28154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28165 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
28166 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
28170 \begin_layout Standard
28171 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
28172 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
28173 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
28174 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28176 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28178 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
28185 \begin_layout Subsection
28186 Grouping Index Entries
28187 \begin_inset Index idx
28190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28199 \begin_layout Standard
28200 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
28202 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
28203 lists under the entry
28204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28212 First we create the entry
28213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28221 \begin_inset space ~
28225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28227 reference "subsec:Lists"
28232 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
28233 \begin_inset space ~
28237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28239 reference "sec:Itemize"
28243 , we insert the command
28246 \begin_layout Standard
28252 \begin_layout Standard
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28262 \begin_layout Standard
28263 for the enumerated list in section
28264 \begin_inset space ~
28268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28270 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28277 \begin_layout Standard
28278 The exclamation mark
28279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28286 marks the grouping levels.
28287 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28288 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28289 If we don't have an index entry for
28290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28297 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28300 \begin_layout Subsection
28302 \begin_inset Index idx
28305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28306 Index ! Page ranges
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28315 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28317 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28318 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28319 an index entry in section
28320 \begin_inset space ~
28324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28326 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28333 \begin_layout Standard
28336 Paragraph environments|(
28339 \begin_layout Standard
28340 and another entry at the end of section
28341 \begin_inset space ~
28345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28347 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28354 \begin_layout Standard
28357 Paragraph environments|)
28360 \begin_layout Standard
28362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28385 respectively start and end the index range.
28386 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28387 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28388 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28389 An example is the index entry
28390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28393 Document ! Settings
28394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28400 \begin_layout Subsection
28402 \begin_inset Index idx
28405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28406 Index ! Cross referencing
28414 \begin_layout Standard
28415 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28416 We referred for example in the index entry
28417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28425 \begin_inset space ~
28429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28431 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28435 ) to the index entry
28436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28443 in the same section using the entry
28446 \begin_layout Standard
28449 GIF|see{Image formats}
28452 \begin_layout Standard
28453 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28455 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28456 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28459 \begin_layout Subsection
28461 \begin_inset Index idx
28464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28465 Index ! Entry order
28473 \begin_layout Standard
28474 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28475 follow the rules for the index order.
28476 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28482 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28484 \begin_inset space ~
28488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28490 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28499 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28500 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28525 \begin_inset Index idx
28528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28529 Dummy entries ! maïs
28535 \begin_inset Index idx
28538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28539 Dummy entries ! maître
28545 \begin_inset Index idx
28548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28549 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28554 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28555 maïs, maison, maître.
28556 To achieve this, we use the command
28559 \begin_layout Standard
28562 previous entry@current entry
28565 \begin_layout Standard
28566 In our case we want to have
28567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28582 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28585 \begin_layout Standard
28591 \begin_layout Standard
28592 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28593 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28595 See the next subsection for an example.
28598 \begin_layout Standard
28599 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28605 \begin_layout Standard
28606 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28611 to generate the index (see sec.
28612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28618 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28627 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28628 -package aeguill in sec.
28629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28635 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28639 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28640 -packages although all these index
28641 commands start with
28642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28655 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28660 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28663 \begin_layout Standard
28675 \begin_layout Standard
28687 \begin_layout Subsection
28689 \begin_inset Index idx
28692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28693 Index ! Entry layout
28701 \begin_layout Standard
28702 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28703 \begin_inset Index idx
28706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28709 This is an italic dummy entry
28714 You can also format the page number using the character
28715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28722 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28723 -command without a backslash.
28724 We can write for example
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28730 italic page number:|textit
28733 \begin_layout Standard
28734 to get the page number in italic.
28735 \begin_inset Index idx
28738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28739 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28744 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28745 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28763 \begin_inset space ~
28769 Have a look at section
28770 \begin_inset space ~
28774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28776 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28780 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28784 \begin_layout Standard
28785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28793 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28797 to generate the index, see sec.
28798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28804 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28813 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28818 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28822 key "latexcompanion"
28834 \begin_layout Standard
28835 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28837 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28838 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28839 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28840 If so, put the following in the preamble
28843 \begin_layout Standard
28855 \begin_layout Standard
28859 \begin_layout Standard
28865 \begin_layout Standard
28866 in the index entry.
28867 \begin_inset Index idx
28870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28871 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28876 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28877 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28878 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28881 \begin_layout Standard
28882 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28883 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28884 a bold font for all index entries.
28885 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28897 documentation for details,
28898 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28900 key "makeindex,xindy"
28907 \begin_layout Subsection
28909 \begin_inset Index idx
28912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28921 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28928 \begin_layout Standard
28929 If the index generation program
28933 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28934 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28938 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28939 distribution, is used.
28943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28948 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28949 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28950 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28951 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28952 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28962 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28964 dialog, see section
28965 \begin_inset space ~
28969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28971 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28976 The available options are listed and explained in
28977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28979 key "makeindex,xindy"
28984 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28988 \begin_layout Standard
28989 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28990 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28994 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28998 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28999 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
29002 \begin_layout Subsection
29006 \begin_layout Standard
29007 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
29008 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
29009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29016 next to the standard index.
29018 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
29019 that add this feature.
29026 \begin_inset Index idx
29029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29031 -packages ! splitidx
29036 package to generate multiple indexes.
29037 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
29042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29043 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
29045 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29052 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29053 style, but it also includes
29054 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
29055 Please consult the package's manual for details.
29063 \begin_layout Standard
29064 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
29065 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
29067 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29068 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29071 and select the option
29073 Use multiple Indexes
29080 already contains the standard index
29081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29089 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
29090 also appear as a heading) to the
29094 input field and press the
29099 The new index now also appears in the list.
29100 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
29101 label color to the new index.
29104 \begin_layout Standard
29105 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
29108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29115 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
29116 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
29117 are additional features:
29120 \begin_layout Itemize
29121 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
29122 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
29125 \begin_layout Itemize
29126 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
29127 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
29128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29135 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
29136 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
29137 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
29138 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
29141 \begin_layout Section
29142 Nomenclature/Glossary
29143 \begin_inset Index idx
29146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29153 \begin_inset Index idx
29156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29187 name "sec:Nomenclature"
29194 \begin_layout Standard
29195 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
29196 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
29197 called nomenclature or glossary.
29200 \begin_layout Standard
29201 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29208 \begin_inset Index idx
29211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29213 -packages ! nomencl
29219 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
29221 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29227 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29231 \begin_layout Standard
29232 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
29233 and then use the menu
29235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29241 \begin_inset space ~
29246 or the toolbar button
29249 arg "nomencl-insert"
29254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29265 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29270 The first is the term or
29274 that you wish to define.
29279 of the term or symbol.
29282 \begin_layout Standard
29283 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29291 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29292 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29300 \begin_layout Subsection
29301 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29302 \begin_inset Index idx
29305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29306 Nomenclature ! Layout
29314 \begin_layout Standard
29315 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29319 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29326 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29334 \begin_inset Newline newline
29342 \begin_inset Newline newline
29348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29355 character starts/ends the formula.
29356 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29357 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29369 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29380 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29381 -syntax is given in section
29382 \begin_inset space ~
29386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29388 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29395 \begin_layout Standard
29399 \begin_inset space ~
29404 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29406 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29411 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29418 in this document is:
29419 \begin_inset Newline newline
29424 dummy entry for the character
29429 \begin_inset Newline newline
29441 \begin_inset space ~
29451 font use the command
29480 \begin_layout Standard
29481 If the characters |
29482 \begin_inset space \space{}
29486 \begin_inset space \space{}
29490 \begin_inset space \space{}
29494 \begin_inset space \space{}
29498 \begin_inset space \space{}
29501 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29502 a quote character in front of them.
29503 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29504 LatexCommand nomenclature
29505 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29506 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29513 \begin_layout Subsection
29514 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29515 \begin_inset Index idx
29518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29519 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29527 \begin_layout Standard
29528 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29529 -code of the symbol
29531 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29533 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29536 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29537 LatexCommand nomenclature
29539 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29546 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29550 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29551 LatexCommand nomenclature
29554 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29559 They will be sorted by
29560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29586 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29589 will be sorted before the
29593 since the character
29594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29601 is considered in sorting.
29604 \begin_layout Standard
29605 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29608 \begin_inset space ~
29613 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29614 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29616 For the example given, you can insert
29620 in this field for the
29621 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29628 will be located before
29629 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29635 \begin_layout Standard
29636 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29641 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29650 \begin_layout Subsection
29651 Nomenclature Options
29652 \begin_inset Index idx
29655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29656 Nomenclature ! Options
29664 \begin_layout Standard
29669 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29670 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29673 \begin_layout Description
29674 refeq Appends the phrase
29675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29690 to every nomenclature entry, where
29696 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29699 \begin_layout Description
29700 refpage Appends the phrase
29701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29716 to every nomenclature entry, where
29722 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29725 \begin_layout Description
29726 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29729 \begin_layout Standard
29730 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29731 class options list in the
29733 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29737 In this document the options
29744 \begin_layout Standard
29745 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29751 \begin_layout Standard
29752 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29753 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29758 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29761 \begin_layout Description
29771 \begin_layout Description
29774 nomrefpage Like the
29781 \begin_layout Description
29784 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29793 \begin_layout Description
29797 \begin_inset space ~
29803 \begin_inset space ~
29808 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29811 \begin_layout Standard
29813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29821 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29825 \begin_layout Standard
29833 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29836 \begin_inset Newline newline
29843 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29848 \begin_inset Newline newline
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29867 by their translation.
29870 \begin_layout Subsection
29871 Printing the Nomenclature
29872 \begin_inset Index idx
29875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29876 Nomenclature ! Printing
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29885 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29887 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29888 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29904 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29905 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29906 You can choose between these settings:
29909 \begin_layout Description
29910 Default a space of 1
29911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29917 \begin_layout Description
29919 \begin_inset space ~
29923 \begin_inset space ~
29926 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29929 \begin_layout Description
29930 Custom custom space
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29934 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29943 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29951 For example, in order to change the name to
29955 , add the following line to the preamble:
29958 \begin_layout Standard
29966 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29969 \begin_layout Subsection
29970 Nomenclature Program
29971 \begin_inset Index idx
29974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29975 Nomenclature ! Program
29981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29983 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29990 \begin_layout Standard
29996 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29997 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29999 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
30004 by adding options, see section
30005 \begin_inset space ~
30009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30011 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30016 The available options are listed and explained in
30017 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30019 key "nomencl,makeindex"
30026 \begin_layout Section
30028 \begin_inset Index idx
30031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30038 \begin_inset Index idx
30041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30042 Document ! Branches
30048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30050 name "sec:Branches"
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
30059 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
30060 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
30061 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
30064 \begin_layout Standard
30065 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
30066 allows you to put text into branches.
30067 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
30068 To create a branch, either select the menu
30070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30071 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
30074 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
30076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30083 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
30084 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
30085 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
30086 and whether the name of the branch should
30087 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
30088 (see below for an example).
30089 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
30090 to the name of the other) and to add
30091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30103 \begin_inset space ~
30106 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
30107 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
30110 \begin_layout Standard
30111 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
30112 These boxes are inserted via the menu
30114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30117 where you can choose a branch.
30118 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
30122 \begin_layout Standard
30123 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
30124 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
30127 \begin_layout Standard
30128 \begin_inset Branch Question
30131 \begin_layout Standard
30132 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30141 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
30153 \begin_layout Standard
30160 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30161 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30164 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
30165 Consider for example a file
30166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30173 which has the above branches.
30175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30182 is active, the PDF export file would be called
30183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30206 branch were inactive,
30207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30222 branch was active, likewise
30223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30238 branch was active, and
30239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30242 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
30243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30246 if both branches were active.
30247 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
30250 \begin_layout Standard
30251 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30257 \begin_layout Standard
30258 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
30259 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
30260 definitions for each branch.
30261 For example you can define for the question branch
30265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30266 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30267 -syntax, see section
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30274 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30286 \begin_layout Standard
30296 \begin_layout Standard
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30307 and for the answer branch
30310 \begin_layout Standard
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30330 \begin_layout Standard
30331 \begin_inset Branch Question
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30366 \begin_layout Standard
30367 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30370 \begin_layout Standard
30374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30402 \begin_layout Standard
30403 Now it is possible to use the
30407 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30414 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30417 commands to obtain conditional output.
30418 Here is an example formula where only the
30425 \begin_inset Formula
30427 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30435 \begin_layout Standard
30436 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30451 \begin_inset space \space{}
30454 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30456 For this advanced usage, see the
30461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30464 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30471 \begin_layout Section
30473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30475 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30480 \begin_inset Index idx
30483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30496 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30499 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30501 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30507 \begin_inset Index idx
30510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30512 -packages ! hyperref
30517 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30518 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30519 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30520 part of the document.
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 The header information in the dialog tab
30529 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30530 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30531 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30532 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30536 \begin_inset space ~
30540 \begin_inset space ~
30545 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30546 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30547 and author entries.
30551 \begin_inset space ~
30555 \begin_inset space ~
30559 \begin_inset space ~
30564 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30568 You can specify in the dialog tab
30572 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30577 \begin_inset space ~
30581 \begin_inset space ~
30585 \begin_inset space ~
30590 option allows long links to be split;
30593 \begin_inset space ~
30597 \begin_inset space ~
30601 \begin_inset space ~
30609 \begin_inset space ~
30614 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30617 \begin_inset space ~
30622 colors the different links.
30623 The default colors are:
30626 \begin_layout Labeling
30627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30632 for hyperlinks and URLs
30635 \begin_layout Labeling
30636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30644 \begin_layout Labeling
30645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30654 but you can change these in the field
30659 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30662 \begin_layout Standard
30665 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30668 \begin_layout Standard
30673 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30674 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30675 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30678 \begin_layout Standard
30683 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30684 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30685 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30695 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30696 when opening the PDF.
30698 \begin_inset space ~
30701 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30702 \begin_inset space ~
30705 1 will only display the sections.
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30709 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30710 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30716 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30717 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30726 \begin_layout Section
30728 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30732 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30739 \begin_layout Subsection
30742 \begin_inset Index idx
30745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30755 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30762 \begin_layout Standard
30763 As \SpecialChar LyX
30764 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30765 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30766 commands and constructs,
30769 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30770 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30771 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30772 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30773 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30774 cannot support all packages and
30778 \begin_layout Standard
30779 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30780 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30781 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30785 Code box is created by the menu
30787 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30800 \begin_inset space ~
30805 or by the toolbar button
30818 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30826 \begin_layout Standard
30827 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30829 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30831 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30832 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30839 , you can write the command part
30845 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30846 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30850 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30851 Code box behind the word.
30852 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30853 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30857 \begin_layout Standard
30858 \begin_inset Graphics
30859 filename clipart/ERT.png
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30871 \begin_layout Standard
30872 This is a line with a
30876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 \begin_layout Standard
30900 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30908 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30909 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30910 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30911 know that the command is finished.
30919 \begin_layout Subsection
30920 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30922 \begin_inset Argument 1
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30926 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30933 \begin_inset Index idx
30936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30946 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30953 \begin_layout Standard
30954 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30955 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30956 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30957 uses in the background.
30958 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30959 is based on commands, you can
30960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30968 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30969 any time if you know the right commands.
30970 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30971 is the end of the day.
30972 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30973 all caption labels bold.
30974 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30976 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30980 \begin_layout Standard
30981 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30983 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30985 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30988 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30997 \begin_layout Standard
30998 As result you find that the package
31003 \begin_inset Index idx
31006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31008 -packages ! caption
31014 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
31016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31019 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31034 \begin_inset space ~
31042 \begin_layout Standard
31047 usepackage[options]{package name}
31050 \begin_layout Standard
31051 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
31052 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
31053 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
31054 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
31057 \begin_layout Standard
31058 In your case the package name is
31063 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
31068 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
31069 So you add the command
31072 \begin_layout Standard
31077 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
31080 \begin_layout Standard
31081 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
31085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31086 For more commands provided by the
31090 package, have a look at its documentation,
31091 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31105 \begin_layout Standard
31106 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
31108 For example if you use a
31112 class, you don't need the package
31116 , you can instead write
31119 \begin_layout Standard
31124 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
31129 \begin_layout Standard
31130 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
31131 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
31132 documentation of the document class you want to use.
31139 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
31142 \begin_layout Standard
31143 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
31144 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
31146 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31147 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
31148 Code box as described in the previous
31152 \begin_layout Standard
31153 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31154 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31157 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31159 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
31166 \begin_layout Standard
31167 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
31173 \begin_layout Standard
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31187 \begin_inset Note Note
31190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31191 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
31199 \begin_layout Left Header
31200 \begin_inset Argument 1
31203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31223 \begin_inset Note Note
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31227 defines the header line as described below
31235 \begin_layout Center Header
31236 \begin_inset Argument 1
31239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31248 \begin_layout Right Header
31249 \begin_inset Argument 1
31252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31273 \begin_layout Left Footer
31274 \begin_inset Argument 1
31277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 \begin_layout Center Footer
31299 \begin_inset Argument 1
31302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31314 \begin_inset Newline newline
31318 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31324 \begin_layout Right Footer
31325 \begin_inset Argument 1
31328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31350 \begin_layout Section
31351 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31354 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31359 \begin_inset Index idx
31362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31363 Document ! Header/Footer line
31369 \begin_inset Index idx
31372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31381 \begin_layout Standard
31382 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31386 \begin_inset space ~
31397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31403 \begin_inset space ~
31409 As a second step add in the menu
31411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31412 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31419 Custom Header/Footerlines
31420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31424 This module offers the following 6
31425 \begin_inset space ~
31431 \begin_layout Description
31433 \begin_inset space ~
31437 \begin_inset space ~
31441 \begin_inset space ~
31445 \begin_inset space ~
31449 \begin_inset space ~
31455 \begin_layout Description
31457 \begin_inset space ~
31461 \begin_inset space ~
31465 \begin_inset space ~
31469 \begin_inset space ~
31473 \begin_inset space ~
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31483 \begin_layout Standard
31484 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31485 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31487 \begin_inset space ~
31491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31493 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31497 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31500 \begin_layout Standard
31501 \begin_inset Float figure
31507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31510 \begin_inset Tabular
31511 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31512 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31513 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31514 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31515 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31535 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31546 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31564 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31575 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31579 The normal text on the page goes here.
31580 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31582 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31583 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31588 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31626 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31655 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31673 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31678 name "fig:Page-layout"
31682 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31695 \begin_layout Standard
31696 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31704 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31708 \begin_inset space ~
31713 is set to “Default”.
31714 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31723 \begin_layout Subsection
31727 \begin_layout Standard
31728 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31729 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31730 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31731 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31733 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31734 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31737 \begin_layout Standard
31738 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31739 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31756 \begin_inset space ~
31764 \begin_layout Description
31767 thepage prints the current page number
31770 \begin_layout Description
31773 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31776 \begin_layout Description
31779 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31782 \begin_layout Description
31785 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31786 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31793 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31796 because it usually goes in a left header.
31799 \begin_layout Description
31802 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31803 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31805 It is normally used in the right header.
31808 \begin_layout Subsection
31809 Default header/footer
31812 \begin_layout Standard
31813 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31814 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31815 footer has the page number.
31816 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31817 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31818 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31821 \begin_inset space ~
31829 \begin_layout Subsection
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31834 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31835 Some pages are different.
31836 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31837 a new part or chapter in your book.
31838 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31839 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31840 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31844 Header and footer decoration line
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31848 By default, you get a 0.4
31849 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31852 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31853 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31865 in the following way:
31868 \begin_layout Standard
31875 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31878 \begin_layout Standard
31879 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31888 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31895 \begin_layout Standard
31896 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31898 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31899 \begin_inset space ~
31903 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31913 Several header/footer lines
31916 \begin_layout Standard
31917 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31918 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31919 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31921 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31950 \begin_inset space ~
31958 \begin_layout Standard
31965 headheight}{height}
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31969 where height is a size in standard units.
31970 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31971 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31972 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31973 logfile with the menu
31975 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31993 \begin_inset space ~
31998 to see if you can find a warning about the package
32003 \begin_inset Index idx
32006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32008 -packages ! fancyhdr
32014 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
32015 for your header/footer.
32018 \begin_layout Subsection
32022 \begin_layout Standard
32023 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
32024 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
32025 This example consists of the following definition:
32028 \begin_layout Description
32030 \begin_inset space ~
32039 , empty optional argument
32042 \begin_layout Description
32044 \begin_inset space ~
32047 Header empty, empty optional argument
32050 \begin_layout Description
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32061 in the optional argument
32064 \begin_layout Description
32066 \begin_inset space ~
32075 in the optional argument
32078 \begin_layout Description
32080 \begin_inset space ~
32093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32097 \begin_inset Newline newline
32101 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32108 in the optional argument
32111 \begin_layout Description
32113 \begin_inset space ~
32122 , empty optional argument
32125 \begin_layout Description
32128 headrulewidth set to 2
32129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32135 \begin_layout Standard
32136 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
32137 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
32143 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32152 \begin_layout Standard
32153 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32159 \begin_layout Standard
32163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32167 pagestyle{headings}
32173 \begin_inset Note Note
32176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32177 switches back to page style with the default headings
32185 \begin_layout Section
32186 Previewing Snippets of your Document
32187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32189 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
32194 \begin_inset Index idx
32197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32204 \begin_inset Index idx
32207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32216 \begin_layout Standard
32218 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
32219 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
32220 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
32223 \begin_layout Subsection
32227 \begin_layout Standard
32228 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32234 \begin_inset Index idx
32237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32239 -packages ! preview-latex
32244 (on some systems named simply
32249 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32251 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32257 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32259 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
32267 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
32268 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32269 -package are automatically
32270 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32274 \begin_layout Subsection
32278 \begin_layout Standard
32279 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32280 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32282 activate the option
32285 \begin_inset space ~
32292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32298 \begin_inset space ~
32302 \begin_inset space ~
32305 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
32312 \begin_inset space ~
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32330 is the multiplication factor for the size.
32333 \begin_layout Standard
32334 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32339 \begin_inset space ~
32347 \begin_inset space ~
32355 \begin_layout Standard
32356 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32357 and when you finish
32361 \begin_layout Standard
32362 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32370 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32371 generated by activating the option
32374 \begin_inset space ~
32380 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32388 \begin_layout Subsection
32389 Selected document parts
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32394 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32395 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32396 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32398 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32404 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32405 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32406 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32409 \begin_layout Standard
32410 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32417 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32429 is explained in section
32431 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32436 \begin_inset space ~
32446 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32447 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32448 the final rotated boxes,
32449 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32450 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32452 Here is the result:
32455 \begin_layout Standard
32456 \begin_inset Preview
32458 \begin_layout Standard
32463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32467 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32473 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32483 height_special "totalheight"
32488 backgroundcolor "none"
32491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32516 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32522 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32545 Previewing works also for colors.
32546 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32565 is explained in section
32572 \begin_inset space ~
32585 \begin_layout Standard
32586 \begin_inset Preview
32588 \begin_layout Standard
32592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32611 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32616 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32635 \begin_layout Standard
32636 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32642 \begin_layout Standard
32643 If \SpecialChar LyX
32644 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32645 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32646 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32647 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32648 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32649 the \SpecialChar TeX
32651 If \SpecialChar LyX
32652 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32653 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32655 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32656 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32657 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32660 \begin_layout Subsection
32665 \begin_layout Standard
32666 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32667 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32670 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32672 \begin_inset space ~
32677 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32679 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32681 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32682 's main window, then only this selection
32683 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32684 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32685 the source view window.
32690 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32691 ; but note that if you have
32692 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32694 not just the one which is open at the time.
32697 \begin_layout Section
32698 Advanced Find and Replace
32699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32701 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32706 \begin_inset Index idx
32709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32716 \begin_inset Index idx
32719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32728 \begin_layout Subsection
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32734 allows for searching of complex,
32735 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32737 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32738 The key-features are:
32741 \begin_layout Itemize
32742 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32743 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32744 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32748 \begin_layout Itemize
32749 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32750 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32751 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32752 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32755 \begin_layout Itemize
32756 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32757 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32758 outside of mathematics environments
32761 \begin_layout Itemize
32762 Search may be widened to a specific
32767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32771 \begin_inset space ~
32774 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32775 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32782 \begin_layout Itemize
32783 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32784 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32789 \begin_inset space ~
32792 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32795 \begin_layout Subsection
32799 \begin_layout Standard
32800 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32802 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32815 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32818 ) or the toolbar button
32821 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32827 Advanced Find and Replace
32832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32836 \begin_layout Standard
32842 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32846 \begin_inset space ~
32851 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32854 arg "paragraph-break"
32858 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32859 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32863 arg "paragraph-break"
32866 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32870 searches backwards.
32873 \begin_layout Standard
32877 \begin_inset space ~
32882 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32896 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32900 Searching for mathematics
32903 \begin_layout Standard
32904 Mathematical formulas, such as
32905 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32908 or something more complex like
32909 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32912 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32917 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32918 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32919 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32920 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32931 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32932 This is done by switching to the
32936 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32941 This way, entering in the
32948 \begin_layout Itemize
32949 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32950 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32953 \begin_layout Itemize
32954 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32955 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32958 \begin_layout Itemize
32959 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32960 of it only within section headings.
32961 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32962 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32966 \begin_layout Itemize
32967 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32968 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32975 \begin_layout Standard
32976 The entries made in the
32980 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32983 \begin_inset space ~
32989 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32993 button or alternatively press
32996 arg "paragraph-break"
33003 while the cursor is in the
33006 \begin_inset space ~
33014 \begin_layout Standard
33015 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
33017 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
33021 \begin_layout Itemize
33022 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
33023 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
33024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33031 with its typewriter version
33032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33046 \begin_layout Itemize
33047 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
33049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33053 \begin_inset Formula $R$
33057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33065 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
33069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33072 (you may want to enable the
33075 \begin_inset space ~
33083 \begin_inset space ~
33088 options and disable the
33096 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
33097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33104 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
33105 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
33109 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
33112 , or occurrences of
33113 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
33117 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
33123 \begin_layout Subsection
33127 \begin_layout Standard
33128 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
33135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33137 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
33146 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
33152 This is done with the context menu
33154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33155 Insert Regular Expression
33157 while the cursor is in the
33162 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
33163 expression matching rules
33167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33168 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
33171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33175 \begin_inset space ~
33178 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
33179 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
33185 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
33186 same text in the document.
33187 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
33188 Examples of using such a feature may be:
33191 \begin_layout Enumerate
33192 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
33197 editor the fraction
33198 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
33202 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33205 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
33206 fractions with the given denominator.
33209 \begin_layout Enumerate
33210 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
33222 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33227 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
33228 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
33229 Also, by inserting a
33230 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33233 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
33234 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
33237 \begin_layout Standard
33238 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
33239 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
33240 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33243 , and referring back to them through
33244 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33248 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
33252 For example, try searching with the regexp
33253 \begin_inset Newline newline
33256 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
33259 \begin_inset Newline newline
33262 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
33265 \begin_layout Standard
33266 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
33269 \begin_layout Standard
33270 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33278 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33279 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33280 sub-expressions is absolute.
33282 \begin_inset space ~
33286 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33289 always refers to the first occurrence of
33290 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33293 in all entered regexps.
33301 \begin_layout Section
33303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33305 name "sec:Spellchecking"
33310 \begin_inset Index idx
33313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33322 \begin_layout Standard
33324 has a built-in spell checker.
33327 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33334 key or the toolbar button
33337 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33340 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33341 beginning of the currently selected text.
33342 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33343 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33344 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33345 scrolled so that it is visible.
33346 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33347 n, if any could be found.
33348 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33352 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33353 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33356 \begin_layout Standard
33357 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33364 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33365 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33367 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33368 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33371 \begin_inset space ~
33379 arg "dialog-show character"
33382 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33384 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33387 \begin_layout Standard
33388 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33389 can be downloaded from here:
33390 \begin_inset Newline newline
33394 \begin_inset Flex URL
33397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33399 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33405 \begin_inset Newline newline
33409 \begin_inset space ~
33412 files for each language.
33413 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33414 \begin_inset space ~
33417 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33418 's installation subfolder
33426 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33428 \begin_inset Newline newline
33431 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33432 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33433 but in most cases these are
33449 is the language code.
33452 \begin_layout Subsection
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33465 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33468 you can set the following things:
33471 \begin_layout Description
33473 \begin_inset space ~
33476 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33477 should use for spell checking.
33478 Depending on your platform,
33492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33493 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33494 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33509 \begin_layout Description
33511 \begin_inset space ~
33514 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33515 will always use the given language
33516 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33519 \begin_layout Description
33521 \begin_inset space ~
33524 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33530 \begin_inset space \space{}
33534 This should normally not be needed.
33537 \begin_layout Description
33539 \begin_inset space ~
33543 \begin_inset space ~
33546 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33558 \begin_layout Description
33560 \begin_inset space ~
33563 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33564 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33565 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33566 appear in a context menu.
33567 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33571 \begin_layout Description
33573 \begin_inset space ~
33577 \begin_inset space ~
33581 \begin_inset space ~
33584 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33588 \begin_layout Section
33590 \begin_inset Index idx
33593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33602 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33609 \begin_layout Standard
33611 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33612 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33624 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33633 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33635 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33636 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33637 which are available for many languages.
33640 \begin_layout Standard
33641 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33642 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33646 \begin_layout Subsection
33647 Setting up the thesaurus
33650 \begin_layout Standard
33659 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33663 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33668 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33674 \begin_inset space ~
33682 For instance, the US English files are named:
33685 \begin_layout Itemize
33689 \begin_layout Itemize
33693 \begin_layout Standard
33702 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33703 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33706 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33707 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33708 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33710 \begin_inset space ~
33715 ) to the path where they are installed.
33719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33720 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33721 ies, typical locations are
33727 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33731 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33735 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33738 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33744 LibreOffice-<Version>
33751 On the Mac, the default location is
33753 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33754 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33755 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33756 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33757 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33758 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33766 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33767 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33768 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33772 \begin_layout Standard
33773 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33774 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33778 \begin_layout Itemize
33779 \begin_inset Flex URL
33782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33784 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33792 \begin_layout Standard
33793 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33794 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33796 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33797 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33798 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33800 \begin_inset space ~
33805 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33807 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33808 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33812 \begin_layout Standard
33813 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33815 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33818 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33824 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33827 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33828 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33836 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33837 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33838 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33840 \begin_inset space ~
33845 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33848 \begin_layout Subsection
33849 Using the thesaurus
33852 \begin_layout Standard
33853 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33858 or the toolbar button
33861 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33864 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33866 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33868 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33869 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33870 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33879 ), related terms (such as
33882 \begin_inset space ~
33891 ), compounds (such as
33894 \begin_inset space ~
33903 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33912 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33915 \begin_layout Standard
33916 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33917 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33921 \begin_layout Standard
33922 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33923 the dictionary, such as the above
33927 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33932 \begin_inset space \space{}
33935 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33936 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33937 For example, looking up the word form
33941 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33946 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33951 \begin_inset space \space{}
33962 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33963 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33964 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33967 \begin_layout Section
33969 \begin_inset Index idx
33972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33979 \begin_inset Index idx
33982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 Document ! Change Tracking
33989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33991 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33998 \begin_layout Standard
33999 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
34000 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
34001 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
34002 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
34004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34009 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34011 \begin_inset space ~
34019 \begin_layout Standard
34020 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
34034 The color depends on the author that made the change.
34035 You can change the color in
34037 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34038 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34040 \begin_inset space ~
34044 \begin_inset space ~
34049 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34055 \begin_inset Index idx
34058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34059 Color ! Change tracking
34064 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
34065 's status bar when the
34066 cursor is in changed text.
34067 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
34070 arg "changes-merge"
34076 \begin_layout Standard
34077 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
34079 \begin_inset Index idx
34082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34091 \begin_layout Standard
34092 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34098 \begin_layout Standard
34099 \begin_inset Graphics
34100 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
34108 \begin_layout Standard
34109 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34115 \begin_layout Standard
34116 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
34119 \begin_layout Standard
34120 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 \begin_inset Tabular
34128 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
34129 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
34130 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34131 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34141 arg "changes-track"
34149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34157 \begin_inset space ~
34160 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34162 \begin_inset space ~
34171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34180 arg "changes-output"
34188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34196 \begin_inset space ~
34199 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34205 \begin_inset space ~
34209 \begin_inset space ~
34218 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34239 Jumps to the next change
34245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34254 arg "change-accept"
34262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34270 \begin_inset space ~
34273 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34293 arg "change-reject"
34301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34309 \begin_inset space ~
34312 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34314 \begin_inset space ~
34323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34332 arg "changes-merge"
34340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34346 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34348 \begin_inset space ~
34351 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34371 arg "all-changes-accept"
34379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34387 \begin_inset space ~
34390 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34392 \begin_inset space ~
34396 \begin_inset space ~
34405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34414 arg "all-changes-reject"
34422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34428 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34430 \begin_inset space ~
34433 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34435 \begin_inset space ~
34439 \begin_inset space ~
34448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34472 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34485 \begin_inset space ~
34494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34517 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34519 \begin_inset space ~
34535 \begin_layout Standard
34536 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34542 \begin_layout Standard
34543 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34565 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34566 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34567 the next change after the current cursor position.
34568 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34569 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34570 step to the next change.
34571 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34574 \begin_layout Standard
34575 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34576 to describe a change.
34579 \begin_layout Standard
34580 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34586 \begin_inset Index idx
34589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34591 -packages ! dvipost
34597 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34605 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34609 \begin_layout Section
34610 Comparison of Documents
34611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34613 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34618 \begin_inset Index idx
34621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34622 Comparison of documents
34630 \begin_layout Standard
34631 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34634 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34638 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34639 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34641 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34643 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34647 \begin_inset space ~
34651 \begin_inset space ~
34655 \begin_inset space ~
34664 \begin_inset space ~
34668 \begin_inset space ~
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34676 \begin_inset space ~
34680 \begin_inset space ~
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34689 enables the change tracking option
34692 \begin_inset space ~
34696 \begin_inset space ~
34700 \begin_inset space ~
34705 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34708 \begin_layout Section
34709 International Support
34710 \begin_inset Index idx
34713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34714 International support
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34723 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34724 with any language you want.
34725 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34726 up \SpecialChar LyX
34728 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34730 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34737 \begin_layout Standard
34738 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34739 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34740 \begin_inset space ~
34744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34746 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34753 \begin_layout Subsection
34755 \begin_inset Index idx
34758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34765 \begin_inset Index idx
34768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34769 Document ! Settings
34775 \begin_inset Index idx
34778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34779 Document ! Language
34787 \begin_layout Standard
34790 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34791 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34794 dialog lets you set
34796 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34801 \begin_layout Standard
34806 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34811 \begin_inset space ~
34816 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34817 For details about the different encoding options see section
34818 \begin_inset space ~
34822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34824 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34831 \begin_layout Subsection
34832 Keyboard mapping configuration
34833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34835 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34842 \begin_layout Standard
34843 If you have for example a U.
34844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34847 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34848 can use an alternate keymap.
34849 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34855 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34856 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34859 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34860 \begin_inset space ~
34864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34866 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34871 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34872 which one you want to use.
34875 \begin_layout Standard
34876 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34877 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34878 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34882 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34883 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34884 one to support the characters you want.
34885 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34892 \begin_layout Chapter
34895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34897 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34904 \begin_layout Standard
34905 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34906 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34907 topic inside the user's guide.
34910 \begin_layout Section
34912 \begin_inset Index idx
34915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34924 \begin_layout Standard
34929 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34932 \begin_layout Subsection
34936 \begin_layout Standard
34937 Creates a new document.
34940 \begin_layout Subsection
34944 \begin_layout Standard
34945 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34946 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34947 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34950 \begin_layout Subsection
34954 \begin_layout Standard
34958 \begin_layout Subsection
34962 \begin_layout Standard
34963 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34964 Click there on a file to open it.
34967 \begin_layout Subsection
34971 \begin_layout Standard
34972 Closes the current document.
34975 \begin_layout Subsection
34979 \begin_layout Standard
34980 Closes all opened documents.
34983 \begin_layout Subsection
34987 \begin_layout Standard
34988 Saves the actual document.
34991 \begin_layout Subsection
34995 \begin_layout Standard
34996 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34999 \begin_layout Subsection
35003 \begin_layout Standard
35004 Saves all opened documents.
35007 \begin_layout Subsection
35011 \begin_layout Standard
35012 Reloads the actual document from disk.
35015 \begin_layout Subsection
35019 \begin_layout Standard
35020 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
35021 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
35022 It is described in the section
35024 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
35029 Additional Features
35034 \begin_layout Subsection
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35039 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
35040 -versions, HTML-files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
35041 -files, NoWeb-files,
35042 plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
35043 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
35047 \begin_layout Standard
35048 When using the menu entry
35051 \begin_inset space ~
35056 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35064 \begin_inset space ~
35068 \begin_inset space ~
35073 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
35074 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
35077 \begin_layout Subsection
35079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35081 name "subsec:Export"
35088 \begin_layout Standard
35089 You can export your document to various file formats.
35090 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
35092 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
35093 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
35094 during its configuration.
35097 \begin_layout Standard
35098 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
35100 \begin_inset space ~
35104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35106 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
35113 \begin_layout Description
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35133 yX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
35135 \begin_inset space ~
35138 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
35139 \begin_inset Newline newline
35142 Since \SpecialChar LyX
35143 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
35147 \begin_layout Description
35148 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
35154 \begin_layout Description
35156 \begin_inset space ~
35159 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
35165 \begin_layout Description
35166 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
35167 's native DVI-format.
35168 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
35169 files paths or file names in your document.
35171 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
35178 \begin_layout Description
35179 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
35180 in files paths or file names
35183 \begin_layout Description
35185 \begin_inset space ~
35192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35199 eX) DVI-format using the program
35201 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35204 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
35208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35216 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
35224 \begin_layout Description
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35229 (cropped) the same as
35233 but with cropped page margins.
35236 \begin_layout Description
35238 \begin_inset space ~
35241 Dot text file with code in the programming language
35245 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
35250 \begin_layout Description
35254 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
35270 \begin_layout Description
35272 \begin_inset space ~
35276 \begin_inset space ~
35279 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35283 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35291 \begin_layout Description
35298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35330 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35331 source that is compilable with the program
35333 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35337 \begin_layout Description
35344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35352 \begin_inset space ~
35357 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35358 source, additionally all images used in the document
35359 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35363 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35366 \begin_layout Description
35373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35381 \begin_inset space ~
35386 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35387 source code, additionally all images used in the document
35388 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
35396 \begin_layout Description
35403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35435 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35436 source that is compilable with the program
35442 \begin_layout Description
35444 \begin_inset space ~
35448 \begin_inset space ~
35457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35467 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35468 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35474 \begin_layout Description
35481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35494 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35495 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35501 \begin_inset space \space{}
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35525 represent the version number)
35528 \begin_layout Description
35535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35552 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35553 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35554 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35558 \begin_layout Description
35565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35574 yXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35575 's internal XHTML engine
35578 \begin_layout Description
35579 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35584 \begin_layout Description
35585 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
35587 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35590 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
35594 \begin_layout Description
35596 \begin_inset space ~
35599 (cropped) the same as
35602 \begin_inset space ~
35607 but with cropped page margins
35610 \begin_layout Description
35614 \begin_inset space ~
35619 PDF-format using the program
35623 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35626 \begin_layout Description
35630 \begin_inset space ~
35634 \begin_inset space ~
35642 \begin_inset space ~
35647 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35652 \begin_inset space \space{}
35655 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35659 \begin_layout Description
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35679 PDF-format using the program
35681 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35684 , produces PDF-files directly
35687 \begin_layout Description
35691 \begin_inset space ~
35696 PDF-format using the program
35700 , produces PDF-files directly
35703 \begin_layout Description
35707 \begin_inset space ~
35712 PDF-format using the program
35716 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35719 \begin_layout Description
35723 \begin_inset space ~
35730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35739 PDF-format using the program
35744 , produces PDF-files directly
35747 \begin_layout Description
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35759 \begin_layout Description
35763 \begin_inset space ~
35767 \begin_inset space ~
35772 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35773 and then exported as text using the program
35778 \begin_layout Description
35783 PostScript format using the program
35788 \begin_layout Description
35789 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35790 source and also code in the statistical programming
35804 it is possible to use
35808 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35813 If one of the menu entries
35820 \begin_inset space ~
35829 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35831 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35833 \begin_inset space ~
35837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35839 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35844 \begin_inset Index idx
35847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35848 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35857 \begin_layout Subsection
35861 \begin_layout Standard
35862 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35863 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35866 \begin_inset space ~
35870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35872 reference "sec:Paths"
35877 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35886 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35887 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35888 's preferences as described in section
35889 \begin_inset space ~
35893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35895 reference "subsec:Converters"
35902 \begin_layout Subsection
35903 New and Close Window
35906 \begin_layout Standard
35907 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35911 \begin_layout Subsection
35915 \begin_layout Standard
35916 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35919 \begin_layout Section
35921 \begin_inset Index idx
35924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35933 \begin_layout Subsection
35937 \begin_layout Standard
35938 Described in section
35939 \begin_inset space ~
35943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35945 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35952 \begin_layout Subsection
35953 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35956 \begin_layout Standard
35957 Described in section
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35964 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35971 \begin_layout Subsection
35975 \begin_layout Standard
35976 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35977 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35980 \begin_layout Subsection
35984 \begin_layout Standard
35985 Selects the whole document.
35988 \begin_layout Subsection
35989 Find & Replace (Quick)
35992 \begin_layout Standard
35993 Described in section
35994 \begin_inset space ~
35998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36000 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36007 \begin_layout Subsection
36008 Find & Replace (Advanced)
36011 \begin_layout Standard
36012 Described in section
36013 \begin_inset space ~
36017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36019 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36026 \begin_layout Subsection
36027 Move Paragraph Up/Down
36030 \begin_layout Standard
36031 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
36035 \begin_layout Subsection
36039 \begin_layout Standard
36040 Described in section
36041 \begin_inset space ~
36045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36047 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
36054 \begin_layout Subsection
36056 \begin_inset Index idx
36059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36060 Paragraph ! Settings
36068 \begin_layout Standard
36069 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
36070 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
36074 \begin_layout Standard
36075 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
36076 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
36082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36083 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36085 \begin_inset space ~
36093 \begin_layout Subsection
36097 \begin_layout Standard
36098 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
36099 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
36100 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
36104 \begin_layout Standard
36105 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
36107 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
36108 The properties of tables are described in section
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36115 reference "sec:Tables"
36119 , the properties of formulas in chapter
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36126 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36133 \begin_layout Subsection
36134 Increase/Decrease List Depth
36137 \begin_layout Standard
36138 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
36140 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
36141 \begin_inset space ~
36145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36147 reference "sec:Nesting"
36152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36154 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
36161 \begin_layout Subsection
36164 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
36167 \begin_layout Standard
36168 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
36169 nts of the same type.
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36177 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
36181 for an explanation.
36184 \begin_layout Section
36186 \begin_inset Index idx
36189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36198 \begin_layout Standard
36199 At the bottom of the
36203 menu the opened documents are listed.
36206 \begin_layout Subsection
36207 Open/Close all Insets
36210 \begin_layout Standard
36211 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
36214 \begin_layout Subsection
36215 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
36218 \begin_layout Standard
36219 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
36222 \begin_layout Standard
36223 Math macros are described in the
36230 \begin_layout Subsection
36234 \begin_layout Standard
36235 Shows the outline window as described in sections
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36242 reference "sec:Navigating"
36247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36249 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36256 \begin_layout Subsection
36260 \begin_layout Standard
36261 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36269 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36276 \begin_layout Subsection
36280 \begin_layout Standard
36281 Opens a window showing console messages.
36282 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36287 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36288 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36289 is processing the document.
36292 \begin_layout Subsection
36294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36296 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36301 \begin_inset Index idx
36304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36313 \begin_layout Standard
36314 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36315 All toolbars and the
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36323 can be turned on and off.
36328 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36357 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36361 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36368 \begin_layout Standard
36373 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36377 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36378 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36379 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36380 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36381 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36386 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36393 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36400 \begin_layout Subsection
36404 \begin_layout Standard
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36424 \begin_inset space ~
36428 \begin_inset space ~
36433 will split \SpecialChar LyX
36434 's main window vertically while
36437 \begin_inset space ~
36441 \begin_inset space ~
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36449 \begin_inset space ~
36453 \begin_inset space ~
36457 \begin_inset space ~
36462 will split it horizontally.
36463 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36464 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36465 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36466 three or more documents at the same time.
36467 To close a split view, use the menu
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36482 \begin_layout Subsection
36486 \begin_layout Standard
36487 Closes a split view.
36490 \begin_layout Subsection
36494 \begin_layout Standard
36495 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36496 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36497 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36498 's main window fullscreen.
36499 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36500 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36503 \begin_layout Section
36505 \begin_inset Index idx
36508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36517 \begin_layout Subsection
36521 \begin_layout Standard
36522 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36529 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36540 \begin_layout Subsection
36542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36544 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36551 \begin_layout Standard
36552 Here you can insert the following characters:
36555 \begin_layout Description
36560 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36563 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36564 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36565 -packages you have installed.
36566 You can get a complete display by checking
36569 \begin_inset space ~
36575 \begin_inset Newline newline
36579 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36587 Not all characters will be visible in the
36591 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36593 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36599 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36603 ) can display every character.
36611 \begin_layout Description
36612 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36616 \begin_layout Description
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36625 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36632 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36639 \begin_layout Description
36641 \begin_inset space ~
36644 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36648 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36654 \begin_layout Description
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36659 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36663 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36669 \begin_layout Description
36671 \begin_inset space ~
36674 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36678 \begin_layout Description
36680 \begin_inset space ~
36683 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36687 \begin_layout Description
36689 \begin_inset space ~
36692 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36698 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36704 \begin_layout Description
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36709 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36713 \begin_layout Description
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset Index idx
36722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36729 \begin_inset Index idx
36732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36733 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36738 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36739 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36741 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36747 \begin_inset Index idx
36750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36758 \begin_inset Newline newline
36761 More information about this feature can be found in the
36767 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36773 \begin_layout Subsection
36777 \begin_layout Standard
36778 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36781 \begin_layout Description
36782 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36783 \begin_inset script superscript
36785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36794 \begin_layout Description
36795 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36796 \begin_inset script subscript
36798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36807 \begin_layout Description
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36812 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36813 \begin_inset space ~
36817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36819 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36826 \begin_layout Description
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36831 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36832 \begin_inset space ~
36836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36838 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36845 \begin_layout Description
36847 \begin_inset space ~
36850 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36851 \begin_inset space ~
36855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36857 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36864 \begin_layout Description
36866 \begin_inset space ~
36869 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36875 \begin_inset space \space{}
36878 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36879 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36888 To insert a fraction use the command
36893 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36897 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36906 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36913 \begin_layout Description
36915 \begin_inset space ~
36918 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36919 \begin_inset space ~
36923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36925 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36932 \begin_layout Description
36934 \begin_inset space ~
36937 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36938 \begin_inset space ~
36942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36944 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36951 \begin_layout Description
36953 \begin_inset space ~
36956 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36957 \begin_inset space ~
36961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36963 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36970 \begin_layout Description
36971 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36972 \begin_inset space ~
36976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36978 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36985 \begin_layout Description
36987 \begin_inset space ~
36990 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36997 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
37004 \begin_layout Description
37006 \begin_inset space ~
37009 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
37010 \begin_inset space ~
37014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37016 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
37023 \begin_layout Description
37025 \begin_inset space ~
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37032 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37039 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37046 \begin_layout Description
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37051 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
37052 as described in section
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37059 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37066 \begin_layout Description
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37071 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
37072 \begin_inset space ~
37076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37078 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37085 \begin_layout Description
37087 \begin_inset space ~
37090 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
37091 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37099 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37106 \begin_layout Description
37108 \begin_inset space ~
37111 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37118 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37125 \begin_layout Description
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37134 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37141 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37153 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
37157 \begin_inset space ~
37178 are described in section
37179 \begin_inset space ~
37183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37185 reference "sec:toc"
37194 is described in section
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37201 reference "sec:Index"
37209 is described in section
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37216 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37222 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37225 is described in section
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37232 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
37239 \begin_layout Subsection
37243 \begin_layout Standard
37244 To insert floats, as described in section
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37251 reference "sec:Floats"
37255 and in detail the chapter
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37270 \begin_layout Subsection
37274 \begin_layout Standard
37275 To insert notes, described in section
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37282 reference "sec:Notes"
37289 \begin_layout Subsection
37293 \begin_layout Standard
37294 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37296 Branches are described in section
37297 \begin_inset space ~
37301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37303 reference "sec:Branches"
37310 \begin_layout Subsection
37314 \begin_layout Standard
37315 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37316 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37318 An example is the document class
37319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37326 with three custom insets.
37329 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37333 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37339 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37342 \begin_layout Subsection
37344 \begin_inset Index idx
37347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37356 \begin_layout Standard
37357 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37359 For more information see chapter
37361 External Document Parts
37364 \begin_inset space ~
37370 \begin_layout Subsection
37372 \begin_inset Index idx
37375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37384 \begin_layout Standard
37385 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37386 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37393 \begin_inset space ~
37401 \begin_layout Subsection
37405 \begin_layout Standard
37410 dialog as described in section
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37417 reference "sec:Bibliography"
37424 \begin_layout Subsection
37428 \begin_layout Standard
37433 as described in section
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37440 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37447 \begin_layout Subsection
37451 \begin_layout Standard
37456 as described in section
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37463 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37470 \begin_layout Subsection
37472 \begin_inset Index idx
37475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37482 \begin_inset Index idx
37485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37486 Longtables ! Caption
37494 \begin_layout Standard
37495 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
37496 Floats are described in section
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37503 reference "sec:Floats"
37507 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
37514 \begin_inset space ~
37522 \begin_layout Subsection
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37528 \begin_inset space ~
37532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37534 reference "sec:Index"
37541 \begin_layout Subsection
37545 \begin_layout Standard
37546 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37553 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37560 \begin_layout Subsection
37564 \begin_layout Standard
37565 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37566 Tables are described in section
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37573 reference "sec:Tables"
37577 and in detail in the chapter
37584 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_layout Subsection
37596 \begin_layout Standard
37602 Graphics are described in section
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37609 reference "sec:Graphics"
37616 \begin_layout Subsection
37620 \begin_layout Standard
37621 Inserts a URL as described in section
37622 \begin_inset space ~
37626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37628 reference "subsec:URLs"
37635 \begin_layout Subsection
37639 \begin_layout Standard
37640 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37647 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37654 \begin_layout Subsection
37658 \begin_layout Standard
37659 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37660 \begin_inset space ~
37664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37666 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37673 \begin_layout Subsection
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37678 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37685 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37692 \begin_layout Subsection
37696 \begin_layout Standard
37697 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37698 title or caption of a float.
37699 Inserts a short title as described in section
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37706 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37713 \begin_layout Subsection
37718 \begin_layout Standard
37719 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37720 Code box as described in section
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37727 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37734 \begin_layout Subsection
37736 \begin_inset Index idx
37739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37748 \begin_layout Standard
37749 Inserts a program listings box.
37750 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37752 Program Code Listings
37757 \begin_inset space ~
37765 \begin_layout Subsection
37769 \begin_layout Standard
37770 Inserts the actual date.
37771 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37775 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37791 \begin_layout Subsection
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37797 \begin_inset space ~
37801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37803 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37810 \begin_layout Section
37812 \begin_inset Index idx
37815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37825 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37826 \begin_inset space ~
37829 of the current document.
37830 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37833 \begin_layout Subsection
37837 \begin_layout Standard
37838 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37839 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37840 to jump, for example, between section
37841 \begin_inset space ~
37845 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37846 \begin_inset space ~
37849 2.5 and use the submenu
37852 \begin_inset space ~
37856 \begin_inset space ~
37863 \begin_inset space ~
37869 \begin_inset space ~
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37879 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37883 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37889 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37892 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37895 \begin_layout Standard
37896 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37900 \begin_inset space ~
37905 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37908 \begin_inset space ~
37913 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37916 \begin_layout Subsection
37917 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37920 \begin_layout Standard
37921 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37925 \begin_layout Subsection
37929 \begin_layout Standard
37930 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37931 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37932 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37936 \begin_inset space ~
37940 \begin_inset space ~
37948 \begin_layout Subsection
37952 \begin_layout Standard
37953 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37956 The \SpecialChar LyX
37957 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37959 \begin_inset space ~
37967 \begin_inset space ~
37972 manual for a detailed description.
37975 \begin_layout Section
37977 \begin_inset Index idx
37980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37989 \begin_layout Subsection
37993 \begin_layout Standard
37994 Change Tracking is described in section
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38001 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38008 \begin_layout Subsection
38013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38024 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
38025 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
38026 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38028 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
38029 to the clipboard or update the view.
38030 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38034 \begin_layout Subsection
38035 Start Appendix Here
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38039 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
38040 as described in section
38041 \begin_inset space ~
38045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38047 reference "sec:Appendices"
38054 \begin_layout Subsection
38056 \begin_inset space ~
38062 \begin_layout Standard
38063 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
38064 default output format for the document (menu
38066 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38067 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38068 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38070 \begin_inset space ~
38074 \begin_inset space ~
38080 \begin_inset space ~
38084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38086 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38090 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
38093 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38094 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38099 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38101 \begin_inset space ~
38104 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38106 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset space ~
38120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38122 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38126 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38127 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38129 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38130 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38132 \begin_inset space ~
38135 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38137 \begin_inset space ~
38140 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38144 \begin_inset space ~
38148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38150 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38155 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38156 when it is first configured.
38157 The default output format is
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38168 \begin_layout Subsection
38169 View (Other Formats)
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38174 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
38175 actual document with an external program.
38176 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
38177 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38178 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
38180 All possible formats are listed in section
38181 \begin_inset space ~
38185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38187 reference "subsec:Export"
38192 You should at least see the menu entry
38197 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38199 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38201 \begin_inset space ~
38205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38207 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38212 \begin_inset Index idx
38215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38216 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38225 \begin_layout Standard
38226 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
38227 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38229 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38230 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38232 \begin_inset space ~
38235 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38237 \begin_inset space ~
38240 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38244 \begin_inset space ~
38248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38250 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38255 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38256 when it is first configured.
38259 \begin_layout Subsection
38261 \begin_inset space ~
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38268 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38269 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38272 \begin_layout Subsection
38273 Update (Other Formats)
38276 \begin_layout Standard
38277 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38278 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38281 \begin_layout Subsection
38282 View Master Document
38285 \begin_layout Standard
38286 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38302 \begin_inset space ~
38307 manual for more information on this topic).
38308 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38309 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38313 \begin_inset space ~
38317 \begin_inset space ~
38322 generates the output of the whole book, while
38326 will just output the chapter alone.
38329 \begin_layout Standard
38330 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38331 in the document settings (menu
38333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38334 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38335 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38337 \begin_inset space ~
38341 \begin_inset space ~
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38353 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38357 ) or in the preferences (menu
38359 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38360 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38365 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38367 \begin_inset space ~
38370 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38376 \begin_inset space ~
38382 \begin_inset space ~
38386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38388 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38395 \begin_layout Subsection
38396 Update Master Document
38399 \begin_layout Standard
38400 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38416 \begin_inset space ~
38421 manual for more information on this topic).
38422 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38423 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38426 \begin_layout Standard
38427 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38428 in the document settings (menu
38430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38431 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38432 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38444 \begin_inset space ~
38448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38450 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38454 ) or in the preferences (menu
38456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38457 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38459 \begin_inset space ~
38462 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38464 \begin_inset space ~
38467 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38469 \begin_inset space ~
38473 \begin_inset space ~
38479 \begin_inset space ~
38483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38485 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38492 \begin_layout Subsection
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 Un/compresses the current document.
38500 \begin_layout Subsection
38504 \begin_layout Standard
38505 The document settings are described in appendix
38506 \begin_inset space ~
38510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38512 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38519 \begin_layout Section
38521 \begin_inset Index idx
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38533 \begin_layout Subsection
38537 \begin_layout Standard
38538 Spell checking is explained in section
38539 \begin_inset space ~
38543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38545 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38552 \begin_layout Subsection
38556 \begin_layout Standard
38557 The thesaurus is described in section
38558 \begin_inset space ~
38562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38564 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38571 \begin_layout Subsection
38573 \begin_inset Index idx
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 \begin_inset Index idx
38586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38595 \begin_layout Standard
38596 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38597 the highlighted document part.
38600 \begin_layout Subsection
38605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38613 \begin_inset Index idx
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38617 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38626 \begin_layout Standard
38627 Generates with the help of the program
38629 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38632 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38633 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38634 This feature is not available on Windows.
38637 \begin_layout Subsection
38642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38650 \begin_inset Index idx
38653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38663 \begin_layout Standard
38664 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38669 \begin_inset space ~
38674 to see the full filename paths.
38677 \begin_layout Subsection
38679 \begin_inset Index idx
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38691 \begin_layout Standard
38692 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38693 files as described in section
38694 \begin_inset space ~
38698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38700 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38707 \begin_layout Subsection
38709 \begin_inset Index idx
38712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38743 \begin_inset Index idx
38746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38747 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38756 \begin_layout Standard
38757 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38758 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38759 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38760 -packages and programs it needs; see
38762 \begin_inset space ~
38766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38768 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38775 \begin_layout Subsection
38779 \begin_layout Standard
38784 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38785 \begin_inset space ~
38789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38791 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38798 \begin_layout Section
38800 \begin_inset Index idx
38803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38812 \begin_layout Standard
38813 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38814 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38816 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38820 \begin_layout Standard
38825 \begin_inset space ~
38830 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38831 -document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38832 -packages and classes found
38833 by \SpecialChar LyX
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38841 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38848 \begin_layout Standard
38852 \begin_inset space ~
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38868 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38873 \begin_layout Section
38875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38877 name "sec:Toolbars"
38884 \begin_layout Standard
38885 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38886 \begin_inset space ~
38890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38892 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38899 \begin_layout Standard
38900 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38901 This is described in the
38903 Additional Features
38908 \begin_layout Subsection
38910 \begin_inset Index idx
38913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38922 \begin_layout Standard
38923 \begin_inset Graphics
38924 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38932 \begin_layout Standard
38933 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38939 \begin_layout Standard
38940 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38957 \begin_inset Note Note
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38961 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38966 manual for more information.
38974 \begin_layout Standard
38975 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38981 \begin_layout Standard
38982 \begin_inset Tabular
38983 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38984 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38985 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38986 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38992 \begin_inset Graphics
38993 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
39003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39007 pull-down box for the environments
39020 \begin_layout Standard
39021 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
39027 \begin_layout Standard
39029 \begin_inset Tabular
39030 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
39031 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39032 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39033 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39057 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39087 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39117 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39133 arg "dialog-show print"
39141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39177 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39207 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39343 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39357 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39425 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39439 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39440 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39468 Emphasize text, function of the
39470 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39472 \begin_inset space ~
39475 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39505 Set text to noun style, function of the
39507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39509 \begin_inset space ~
39512 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 arg "textstyle-apply"
39538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39542 Format text using the current settings in the
39544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39546 \begin_inset space ~
39549 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39582 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39584 \begin_inset space ~
39593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39602 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39630 arg "tabular-insert"
39638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39660 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39672 Toggle outline window on/off,
39674 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39702 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39717 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39729 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39742 \begin_layout Subsection
39744 \begin_inset Index idx
39747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 \begin_layout Standard
39757 \begin_inset Graphics
39758 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39766 \begin_layout Standard
39767 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39773 \begin_layout Standard
39774 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39778 \begin_layout Standard
39779 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39785 \begin_layout Standard
39786 \begin_inset Tabular
39787 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39788 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39790 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 arg "layout Enumerate"
39835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39854 arg "layout Itemize"
39862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39908 arg "layout Description"
39916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39935 arg "depth-increment"
39943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39949 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39955 \begin_inset space ~
39964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39973 arg "depth-decrement"
39981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39987 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39989 \begin_inset space ~
39993 \begin_inset space ~
40002 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40011 arg "float-insert figure"
40019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40026 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40042 arg "float-insert table"
40050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40056 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40057 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40103 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
40111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40133 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
40141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40197 arg "nomencl-insert"
40205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40231 arg "footnote-insert"
40239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40261 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40277 \begin_inset space ~
40286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40310 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40323 \begin_inset space ~
40332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40341 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40432 \begin_inset space ~
40441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40450 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40465 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40481 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40496 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40516 arg "dialog-show character"
40524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40532 \begin_inset space ~
40535 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40542 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40551 arg "layout-paragraph"
40559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40567 \begin_inset space ~
40576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40585 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40599 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40613 \begin_layout Subsection
40614 View/Update Toolbar
40615 \begin_inset Index idx
40618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40619 Toolbar ! View / Update
40627 \begin_layout Standard
40628 \begin_inset Graphics
40629 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40636 \begin_layout Standard
40637 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40643 \begin_layout Standard
40644 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40648 \begin_layout Standard
40649 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 \begin_inset Tabular
40657 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40658 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40659 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40660 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40684 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40700 arg "buffer-update"
40708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40730 arg "master-buffer-view"
40738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40744 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40746 \begin_inset space ~
40755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40764 arg "master-buffer-update"
40772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40802 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40817 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40818 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40819 Synchronize with Output
40825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40830 \begin_inset Graphics
40831 filename ../images/view-others.png
40833 groupId toolbarbuttons
40844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40851 View (Other Formats)
40857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40862 \begin_inset Graphics
40863 filename ../images/update-others.png
40865 groupId toolbarbuttons
40874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40881 Update (Other Formats)
40894 \begin_layout Standard
40895 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40899 \begin_layout Subsection
40903 \begin_layout Standard
40904 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40905 \begin_inset space ~
40909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40911 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40915 , the table toolbar
40916 \begin_inset Index idx
40919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40933 manual and the math macro toolbar
40934 \begin_inset Index idx
40937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40950 \begin_layout Chapter
40951 The Document Settings
40952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40954 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40959 \begin_inset Index idx
40962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40963 Document ! Settings
40971 \begin_layout Standard
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40980 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40981 is called with the menu
40983 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40987 You can save your document settings as default with the
40989 Save as Document Defaults
40991 button in any dialog.
40992 This will create a template named
40996 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40997 when you create a new document without
41001 \begin_layout Standard
41006 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
41007 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
41010 \begin_layout Standard
41011 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
41012 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
41013 to find the one you are looking for.
41014 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
41015 the submenus of the dialog.
41017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41021 \begin_inset space \space{}
41025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41032 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
41033 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
41034 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
41037 \begin_layout Section
41041 \begin_layout Standard
41042 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
41044 Document classes are described in section
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41051 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
41059 \begin_layout Standard
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41068 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
41073 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
41074 as a layout for a document class.
41075 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
41077 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
41086 \begin_layout Standard
41087 Some classes use special class options by default.
41088 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
41092 and you can decide to use them or not.
41093 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
41094 recommended you leave them untouched.
41099 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41100 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
41105 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41107 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41113 When you want to use one of the following drivers
41114 \begin_inset Newline newline
41119 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
41122 \begin_inset Newline newline
41125 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41126 distribution, see section
41131 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41133 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
41145 \begin_layout Standard
41150 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
41151 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
41152 in the background if the child document
41153 is opened without its master.
41154 This way child documents are always compilable.
41155 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41170 \begin_layout Standard
41171 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41182 \begin_inset Index idx
41185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 -packages ! prettyref
41193 \begin_inset Index idx
41196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41198 -packages ! refstyle
41203 for cross-references, see section
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41210 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41217 \begin_layout Section
41221 \begin_layout Standard
41222 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
41223 Please refer to the section
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41239 manual for details.
41242 \begin_layout Section
41246 \begin_layout Standard
41247 Modules are explained in section
41248 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41254 reference "subsec:Modules"
41261 \begin_layout Section
41265 \begin_layout Standard
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41273 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41280 \begin_layout Section
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41285 The document font settings are described in section
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41292 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41299 \begin_layout Section
41303 \begin_layout Standard
41304 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41321 and whether it should be a
41324 \begin_inset space ~
41329 can also be specified here.
41332 \begin_layout Standard
41333 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41334 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41335 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41337 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41340 \begin_layout Standard
41343 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41346 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41347 justifies the text on screen.
41348 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41352 \begin_layout Section
41356 \begin_layout Standard
41357 This dialog is described in sections
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41364 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41371 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41378 \begin_layout Section
41382 \begin_layout Standard
41383 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41390 reference "subsec:Margins"
41397 \begin_layout Section
41399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41401 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41406 \begin_inset Index idx
41409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41410 Language ! Encoding
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41419 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41420 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41421 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41423 is always encoded in utf8).
41424 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41425 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41426 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41427 -command is not known for
41428 a particular character).
41431 \begin_layout Standard
41432 If you use the option
41437 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
41438 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
41439 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41441 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
41442 exactly one encoding.
41443 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
41446 \begin_layout Standard
41448 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
41449 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
41450 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41451 installation supports Unicode), choose
41452 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
41453 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41454 is quite incomplete, so
41455 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41460 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41461 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41462 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41463 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41464 -commands is not used, because all
41465 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41466 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41467 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41468 , two new alternative engines
41469 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41471 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41473 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41514 \begin_inset space ~
41517 (Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41527 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41532 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41536 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41539 \begin_layout Standard
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41548 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41549 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41559 The possible settings are:
41562 \begin_layout Description
41563 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41566 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41576 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41583 \begin_layout Description
41584 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41585 format you will use.
41586 In many cases this will be
41591 \begin_inset Index idx
41594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41602 If the newer package
41607 \begin_inset Index idx
41610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41612 -packages ! polyglossia
41617 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41618 or LuaTeX and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41620 this package will be used instead of
41627 \begin_layout Description
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41640 would be more appropriate.
41643 \begin_layout Description
41644 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41645 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41649 (for German texts), type in
41652 \begin_inset Newline newline
41657 usepackage{ngerman}
41660 \begin_layout Description
41661 None will not use a language package.
41662 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41665 \begin_layout Standard
41666 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41669 \begin_layout Description
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41675 \begin_inset space ~
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41686 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41692 \begin_inset Index idx
41695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41697 -packages ! inputenc
41703 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41704 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41705 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41709 \begin_layout Description
41710 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41712 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41713 commands, which may result in a big
41714 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41715 -commands are needed.
41718 \begin_layout Description
41720 \begin_inset space ~
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41727 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41730 \begin_layout Description
41732 \begin_inset space ~
41736 \begin_inset space ~
41739 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41742 \begin_layout Description
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41747 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41750 \begin_layout Description
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41759 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41760 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41763 \begin_layout Description
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41772 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41776 \begin_layout Description
41778 \begin_inset space ~
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41785 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41786 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41789 \begin_layout Description
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41802 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41803 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_layout Description
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41822 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41823 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41826 \begin_layout Description
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41835 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41836 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41837 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41838 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41839 \begin_inset space ~
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_layout Description
41851 \begin_inset space ~
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41858 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41859 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41860 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41862 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41867 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_layout Description
41875 \begin_inset space ~
41879 \begin_inset space ~
41882 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41885 \begin_layout Description
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41894 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41897 \begin_layout Description
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41903 \begin_inset space ~
41906 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41909 \begin_layout Description
41911 \begin_inset space ~
41914 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41917 \begin_layout Description
41919 \begin_inset space ~
41922 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41925 \begin_layout Description
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41934 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41937 \begin_layout Description
41939 \begin_inset space ~
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41949 \begin_layout Description
41951 \begin_inset space ~
41955 \begin_inset space ~
41958 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41961 \begin_layout Description
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41973 \begin_layout Description
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41979 \begin_inset space ~
41982 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41988 \begin_inset Index idx
41991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41998 , when using this, set the document language to
42003 \begin_layout Description
42005 \begin_inset space ~
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42012 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42017 , when using this, set the document language to
42020 \begin_inset space ~
42026 \begin_layout Description
42028 \begin_inset space ~
42032 \begin_inset space ~
42035 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42041 \begin_inset Index idx
42044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42046 -packages ! japanese
42051 , when using this, set the document language to
42056 \begin_layout Description
42058 \begin_inset space ~
42062 \begin_inset space ~
42065 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42070 , when using this, set the document language to
42075 \begin_layout Description
42077 \begin_inset space ~
42081 \begin_inset space ~
42084 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42089 , when using this, set the document language to
42094 \begin_layout Description
42096 \begin_inset space ~
42099 (EUC-KR) for Korean
42102 \begin_layout Description
42104 \begin_inset space ~
42108 \begin_inset space ~
42112 \begin_inset space ~
42115 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
42118 \begin_layout Description
42120 \begin_inset space ~
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42131 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
42132 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
42133 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
42136 \begin_layout Description
42138 \begin_inset space ~
42142 \begin_inset space ~
42148 \begin_layout Description
42150 \begin_inset space ~
42154 \begin_inset space ~
42157 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
42158 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
42161 \begin_layout Description
42163 \begin_inset space ~
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42170 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42176 \begin_inset Index idx
42179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42186 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
42189 \begin_layout Description
42191 \begin_inset space ~
42194 (Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42199 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
42206 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42209 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42216 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42217 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42219 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
42222 \begin_layout Description
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42231 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42237 \begin_inset Index idx
42240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42247 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42250 \begin_layout Description
42252 \begin_inset space ~
42255 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42261 \begin_inset Index idx
42264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42266 -packages ! inputenc
42272 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42276 \begin_layout Description
42278 \begin_inset space ~
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42289 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42296 \begin_layout Description
42298 \begin_inset space ~
42302 \begin_inset space ~
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42309 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42310 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42311 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42315 \begin_layout Description
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42321 \begin_inset space ~
42325 \begin_inset space ~
42328 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42329 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42332 \begin_layout Section
42334 \begin_inset Index idx
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42344 \begin_inset Index idx
42347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42354 \begin_inset Index idx
42357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42358 Color ! Shaded boxes
42364 \begin_inset Index idx
42367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42368 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42376 \begin_layout Standard
42377 Here you can alter the font color for the
42381 (default: black), for
42384 \begin_inset space ~
42389 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42393 (default: white) and for
42396 \begin_inset space ~
42406 sets the color back to the default.
42409 \begin_layout Standard
42410 Clicking any button showing
42418 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42419 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42420 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42421 later more quickly.
42424 \begin_layout Standard
42425 Note, if you change the
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42433 font color and use the option
42436 \begin_inset space ~
42441 in the document settings under
42444 \begin_inset space ~
42449 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42456 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42463 \begin_layout Standard
42464 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
42470 \begin_layout Standard
42474 \begin_inset space ~
42483 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42486 \begin_inset space ~
42489 Code after a forced page break:
42492 \begin_layout Itemize
42493 For the page color:
42494 \begin_inset Newline newline
42501 pagecolor{color name}
42504 \begin_layout Itemize
42505 For the text color:
42506 \begin_inset Newline newline
42516 \begin_layout Standard
42517 You are restricted to one of
42553 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42560 \begin_inset space ~
42566 \begin_inset Newline newline
42569 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42570 names to refer to them:
42573 \begin_layout Itemize
42579 \begin_inset Newline newline
42584 page_backgroundcolor
42587 \begin_layout Itemize
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42597 \begin_inset Newline newline
42605 \begin_layout Itemize
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42615 \begin_inset Newline newline
42623 \begin_layout Itemize
42627 \begin_inset space ~
42633 \begin_inset Newline newline
42641 \begin_layout Standard
42642 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42645 \begin_inset space ~
42653 \begin_inset space ~
42661 \begin_layout Section
42665 \begin_layout Standard
42666 Here you can adjust the
42670 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42674 as described in section
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42681 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42688 \begin_layout Section
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42693 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42699 \begin_inset Index idx
42702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42714 \begin_inset Index idx
42717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42719 -packages ! jurabib
42727 Sectioned bibliography
42729 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42735 \begin_inset Index idx
42738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42740 -packages ! bibtopic
42745 and you can select a
42749 for the generation of the bibliography.
42750 For a further description see section
42751 \begin_inset space ~
42755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42757 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42764 \begin_layout Section
42768 \begin_layout Standard
42769 Here you can define the
42773 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42775 \begin_inset space ~
42779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42781 reference "sec:Index"
42788 \begin_layout Section
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42793 The PDF properties are explained in section
42794 \begin_inset space ~
42798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42800 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42807 \begin_layout Section
42811 \begin_layout Standard
42812 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42813 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42819 \begin_inset Index idx
42822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42824 -packages ! amsmath
42834 \begin_inset Index idx
42837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42839 -packages ! amssymb
42849 \begin_inset Index idx
42852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42864 \begin_inset Index idx
42867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42879 \begin_inset Index idx
42882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42884 -packages ! mathdots
42894 \begin_inset Index idx
42897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42899 -packages ! mathtools
42909 \begin_inset Index idx
42912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42924 \begin_inset Index idx
42927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42929 -packages ! stackrel
42939 \begin_inset Index idx
42942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42944 -packages ! stmaryrd
42954 \begin_inset Index idx
42957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42959 -packages ! undertilde
42964 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42967 \begin_layout Description
42968 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42969 -errors in formulas,
42970 ensure that you have this enabled.
42973 \begin_layout Description
42974 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42975 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42976 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42980 \begin_layout Description
42981 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42984 \begin_inset space ~
42996 \begin_layout Description
42997 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
43000 \begin_inset space ~
43012 \begin_layout Description
43013 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
43024 \begin_layout Description
43025 mathtools is used for the math commands
43061 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
43068 \begin_layout Description
43069 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
43071 Chemical Symbols and Equations
43080 \begin_layout Description
43081 stackrel is used for the math command
43098 \begin_layout Description
43099 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
43102 \begin_layout Description
43103 undertilde is used for the math command
43111 Accents for one Character
43120 \begin_layout Section
43124 \begin_layout Standard
43125 The float placement options are described in the section
43128 \begin_inset space ~
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43144 \begin_layout Section
43148 \begin_layout Standard
43149 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
43151 Program Code Listings
43156 \begin_inset space ~
43164 \begin_layout Section
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43169 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
43177 set to be used and set the
43182 The itemize environment is described in section
43183 \begin_inset space ~
43187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43189 reference "sec:Itemize"
43196 \begin_layout Standard
43197 You can furthermore specify a
43200 \begin_inset space ~
43205 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43206 command of the desired character.
43207 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
43214 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
43216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43220 \begin_inset space \space{}
43224 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
43234 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
43235 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43239 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43247 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43248 -packages in the preamble (menu
43251 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43252 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43255 \begin_inset space ~
43261 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43265 usepackage{textcomp}
43268 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43272 usepackage{amssymb}
43282 \begin_layout Section
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43287 Branches are described in section
43288 \begin_inset space ~
43292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43294 reference "sec:Branches"
43301 \begin_layout Section
43303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43305 name "sec:Doc-Output"
43312 \begin_layout Standard
43313 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43316 \begin_layout Description
43318 \begin_inset space ~
43322 \begin_inset space ~
43325 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43345 View Master Document
43346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43353 Update Master Document
43354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43361 menu or the toolbar.
43362 The default is set in
43364 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43365 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43367 \begin_inset space ~
43370 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43380 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43387 \begin_layout Description
43389 \begin_inset space ~
43393 \begin_inset space ~
43396 Output settings for the menu
43398 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43400 \begin_inset space ~
43406 For a detailed description see section
43408 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43421 \begin_layout Description
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43427 \begin_inset space ~
43430 Options offers settings for the export format
43436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43449 \begin_inset space ~
43454 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43455 \begin_inset space ~
43458 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
43462 \begin_inset space ~
43467 settings are described in detail in section
43469 Math Output in XHTML
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43492 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43495 \begin_layout Section
43500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 \begin_layout Standard
43511 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43513 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43515 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43517 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43521 \begin_layout Standard
43522 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43523 -syntax is given in section
43524 \begin_inset space ~
43528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43530 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43537 \begin_layout Chapter
43543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43545 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43550 \begin_inset Index idx
43553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43562 \begin_layout Standard
43563 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43569 It has the following submenus.
43572 \begin_layout Section
43576 \begin_layout Subsection
43580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43581 User Interface File
43582 \begin_inset Index idx
43585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43586 Customization ! of toolbars
43592 \begin_inset Index idx
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43596 Customization ! of menus
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43605 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43606 interface (ui) file.
43607 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43615 \begin_layout Description
43620 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43623 \begin_layout Description
43630 the menu entries in popup context menus
43633 \begin_layout Description
43638 specifies the toolbar buttons
43641 \begin_layout Standard
43642 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43643 and edit the entries.
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43647 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43659 entries must be finished with an explicit
43684 and in the case of the
43685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43697 The syntax for the entries is:
43700 \begin_layout Standard
43701 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43730 \begin_layout Standard
43732 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43735 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43736 -functions are listed in the menu
43738 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43759 \begin_layout Standard
43760 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43766 \begin_layout Standard
43767 For example, assuming you use the menu
43769 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43772 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43777 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43801 \begin_layout Standard
43803 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43818 to have the sixth bookmark.
43821 \begin_layout Standard
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43830 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43831 's toolbar buttons.
43832 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43836 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43847 \begin_layout Standard
43850 Enable tool tips in main work area
43852 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43860 \begin_layout Standard
43865 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43866 should display in the menu
43868 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_layout Subsection
43882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43886 \begin_layout Standard
43889 Restore window layouts and geometries
43892 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43893 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43897 \begin_layout Standard
43900 Restore cursor positions
43902 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43906 \begin_layout Standard
43909 Load opened files from last session
43911 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43915 \begin_layout Standard
43918 Clear all session information
43920 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43921 sessions (cursor positions, names
43922 of last opened documents, etc.).
43925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43929 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43934 \begin_inset Index idx
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43946 \begin_layout Standard
43949 Backup original documents when saving
43951 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43952 it was saved the last time.
43953 It is stored in the
43956 \begin_inset space ~
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43968 reference "sec:Paths"
43972 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43981 The backup file has the file extension
43982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43996 \begin_layout Standard
43999 Backup documents, every
44001 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
44004 \begin_layout Standard
44007 Save documents compressed by default
44009 always saves files in a compressed format.
44012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44013 Windows & work area
44016 \begin_layout Standard
44019 Open documents in tabs
44021 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44025 \begin_layout Standard
44030 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
44035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44043 reference "sec:Paths"
44047 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
44054 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
44055 documents will be opened in the same running instance
44056 of \SpecialChar LyX
44058 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
44059 instance is created for each file.
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44065 Single close-tab button
44067 is checked, there will only be one close button (
44070 \begin_inset Graphics
44071 filename ../images/closetab.png
44078 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
44079 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
44082 \begin_layout Standard
44083 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44091 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
44092 before the change takes effect.
44100 \begin_layout Standard
44105 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
44107 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
44109 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44113 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
44114 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
44115 and only want to close the view in once instance.
44118 \begin_layout Subsection
44120 \begin_inset Index idx
44123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44132 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44139 \begin_layout Standard
44140 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
44144 \begin_layout Standard
44145 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44153 This section only deals with the fonts
44157 the \SpecialChar LyX
44159 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
44162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44163 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44174 \begin_layout Standard
44175 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
44192 (depends on the system) as its
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44211 \begin_layout Standard
44212 You can change the font size with the
44219 \begin_layout Standard
44224 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44229 points have the size of 1
44230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44234 \begin_inset space ~
44238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44240 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44245 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44250 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44257 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44264 \begin_layout Standard
44267 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44269 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44270 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44271 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44272 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44273 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44275 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44282 \begin_layout Subsection
44284 \begin_inset Index idx
44287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44288 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44295 \begin_inset Index idx
44298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 \begin_layout Standard
44308 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44309 by choosing an item in the
44310 list and selecting the
44317 \begin_layout Standard
44318 By checking the option
44322 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44325 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44335 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44338 \begin_layout Subsection
44340 \begin_inset Index idx
44343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44352 \begin_layout Standard
44353 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44357 \begin_layout Standard
44362 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44363 This feature is described in section
44364 \begin_inset space ~
44368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44370 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44377 \begin_layout Standard
44378 Checking the option
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44394 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44397 \begin_layout Section
44399 \begin_inset Index idx
44402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44411 \begin_layout Subsection
44415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44419 \begin_layout Standard
44422 Cursor follows scrollbar
44424 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
44428 \begin_layout Standard
44429 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
44430 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
44431 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
44434 \begin_layout Standard
44437 Scroll below end of document
44439 is self-explanatory.
44442 \begin_layout Standard
44443 In \SpecialChar LyX
44444 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44451 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44453 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44454 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44457 \begin_layout Standard
44460 Sort environments alphabetically
44462 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44465 \begin_layout Standard
44468 Group environments by their category
44470 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44473 \begin_layout Standard
44478 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44489 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44493 \begin_layout Standard
44494 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44499 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44500 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44504 \begin_layout Subsection
44506 \begin_inset Index idx
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44516 \begin_inset Index idx
44519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44520 Settings ! Shortcuts
44528 \begin_layout Standard
44533 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44534 -function to a key.
44535 Several binding files are available, among them:
44538 \begin_layout Description
44539 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44542 \begin_layout Description
44543 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44555 \begin_layout Description
44556 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44567 \begin_layout Standard
44568 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44573 , and binding files for special languages.
44574 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44579 \begin_inset space \space{}
44583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44591 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44592 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44593 will try to use the appropriate binding
44597 \begin_layout Standard
44598 Some binding files, like
44602 , only have a limited scope.
44603 When looking at the end of the file
44607 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44610 \begin_layout Standard
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44623 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44624 in the selected key binding file.
44627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44631 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44636 \begin_inset Index idx
44639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44640 Key Bindings ! Editing
44648 \begin_layout Standard
44649 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44650 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44651 -functions and the bound shortcuts.
44652 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44655 Show key-bindings containing
44658 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44659 Insert there for example as keyword
44660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44667 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44668 functions that contain
44669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44677 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44678 All \SpecialChar LyX
44679 -functions are also listed in the file
44684 that you will find in the
44691 \begin_layout Standard
44692 For example, to add the shortcut
44700 , select the function and press the
44705 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44706 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44709 \begin_layout Standard
44710 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44711 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44713 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44714 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44716 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44721 \begin_layout Standard
44722 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44725 \begin_layout Standard
44726 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44728 The syntax of the entries is:
44731 \begin_layout Standard
44737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44756 \begin_layout Subsection
44758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44760 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44765 \begin_inset Index idx
44768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44775 \begin_inset Index idx
44778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44779 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44787 \begin_layout Standard
44788 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44789 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44790 provides keyboard maps.
44791 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44792 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44795 \begin_inset space ~
44799 \begin_inset space ~
44804 and select the keyboard map file named
44811 \begin_layout Standard
44820 keyboard map and, if you use the
44824 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44827 arg "keymap-primary"
44833 arg "keymap-secondary"
44836 respectively or toggle between them with
44839 arg "keymap-toggle"
44845 \begin_layout Standard
44846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44854 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44864 You can also specify the mouse
44866 Wheel scrolling speed
44869 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44873 \begin_layout Standard
44881 \begin_inset space ~
44885 \begin_inset space ~
44890 you can select a key for zooming.
44891 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44894 \begin_layout Subsection
44898 \begin_layout Standard
44899 Input completion is described in section
44900 \begin_inset space ~
44904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44906 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44913 \begin_layout Section
44915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44922 \begin_inset Index idx
44925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44932 \begin_inset Index idx
44935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44944 \begin_layout Standard
44945 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44946 are normally determined during
44948 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44951 \begin_layout Description
44953 \begin_inset space ~
44956 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44957 's working directory.
44958 It is the default when you
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44977 \begin_layout Description
44979 \begin_inset space ~
44982 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44984 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44986 \begin_inset space ~
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44998 \begin_layout Description
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45003 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45009 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45013 \begin_inset Newline newline
45017 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45029 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
45030 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
45038 \begin_layout Description
45040 \begin_inset space ~
45044 \begin_inset Index idx
45047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45053 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45054 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45061 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45069 will be used to save the backups.
45070 \begin_inset Newline newline
45073 Backup files have the ending
45074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45084 \begin_layout Description
45089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45100 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
45101 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
45103 \begin_inset Newline newline
45110 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45116 You can edit this file with the program
45125 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
45126 in its preferences under
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45135 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45140 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
45142 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
45143 in your \SpecialChar LyX
45149 and \SpecialChar LyX
45150 need to be running the same time.
45151 \begin_inset Newline newline
45154 The pipe is also used for the
45159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45165 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45170 \begin_inset Newline newline
45173 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
45174 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
45175 \begin_inset Newline newline
45191 \begin_layout Description
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45196 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45199 \begin_layout Description
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45204 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
45205 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
45206 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
45209 \begin_layout Description
45211 \begin_inset space ~
45214 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
45220 You only need to specify it if you are using
45224 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
45226 For \SpecialChar LyX
45231 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
45235 \begin_layout Description
45237 \begin_inset space ~
45240 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45241 When \SpecialChar LyX
45242 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45243 to find it on the system.
45244 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45246 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45255 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45256 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45259 \begin_layout Description
45261 \begin_inset space ~
45264 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45265 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45266 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45267 code or in the document
45269 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45271 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45272 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45273 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45274 scanned for the input files.
45275 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45276 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45278 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45279 compilation may fail for some documents.
45282 \begin_layout Section
45286 \begin_layout Standard
45287 Here you can insert your
45296 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45298 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45304 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45308 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45311 \begin_layout Section
45313 \begin_inset Index idx
45316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45317 Language ! Settings
45323 \begin_inset Index idx
45326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 Settings ! Language
45335 \begin_layout Subsection
45337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45339 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45346 \begin_layout Description
45348 \begin_inset space ~
45352 \begin_inset space ~
45355 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45357 You can find its actual translation status here:
45358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45360 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45367 \begin_layout Description
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45372 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45373 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45374 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45375 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45392 The most widespread language package is
45397 \begin_inset Index idx
45400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45407 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45409 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45410 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45411 come with the alternative
45417 \begin_inset Index idx
45420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45422 -packages ! polyglossia
45427 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45428 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45434 The available selections are described in section
45435 \begin_inset space ~
45439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45441 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45448 \begin_layout Description
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45453 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45454 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45455 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45456 An example is the start command
45462 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45464 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45468 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45483 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45488 \begin_layout Description
45490 \begin_inset space ~
45498 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45499 command toggles the package on and off.
45502 \begin_layout Description
45504 \begin_inset space ~
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45511 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45515 \begin_layout Description
45517 \begin_inset space ~
45521 \begin_inset space ~
45524 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45528 \begin_layout Description
45530 \begin_inset space ~
45534 \begin_inset space ~
45537 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45538 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45539 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45541 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45548 \begin_layout Description
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45553 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45555 When this option is not set, the
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45563 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45565 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45576 \begin_layout Description
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45584 \begin_inset space ~
45590 When it is not set, the
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45598 is set to the end of the document.
45601 \begin_layout Description
45603 \begin_inset space ~
45607 \begin_inset space ~
45610 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45611 language will be underlined in blue.
45614 \begin_layout Description
45616 \begin_inset space ~
45620 \begin_inset space ~
45623 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45624 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45627 \begin_layout Description
45629 \begin_inset space ~
45632 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45633 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45634 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45635 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45638 \begin_layout Subsection
45642 \begin_layout Standard
45643 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45644 \begin_inset space ~
45648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45650 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45657 \begin_layout Section
45661 \begin_layout Subsection
45665 \begin_layout Description
45667 \begin_inset space ~
45671 \begin_inset space ~
45674 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45677 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45678 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45680 \begin_inset space ~
45686 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45689 \begin_layout Description
45691 \begin_inset space ~
45695 \begin_inset Index idx
45698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 \begin_inset Index idx
45708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45709 Settings ! Date format
45714 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45715 \begin_inset Newline newline
45719 \begin_inset Flex URL
45722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
45730 \begin_inset Newline newline
45733 For example the format
45734 \begin_inset Newline newline
45738 \begin_inset Newline newline
45741 prints the date as day/month/year.
45744 \begin_layout Description
45746 \begin_inset space ~
45750 \begin_inset space ~
45753 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45754 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45757 \begin_layout Description
45759 \begin_inset space ~
45762 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45764 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45766 \begin_inset space ~
45772 For a detailed description see section
45774 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45779 \begin_inset space ~
45787 \begin_layout Subsection
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45802 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45807 \begin_inset Index idx
45810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45811 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45820 \begin_layout Description
45822 \begin_inset space ~
45829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 \begin_inset space ~
45841 \begin_inset space ~
45844 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45849 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45870 are used for Cyrillic.
45871 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45884 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45886 sets up in the background.
45887 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45890 \begin_layout Description
45892 \begin_inset space ~
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45899 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45904 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45908 \begin_layout Description
45910 \begin_inset space ~
45914 \begin_inset space ~
45918 \begin_inset space ~
45922 \begin_inset space ~
45925 options They only have an effect when the program
45929 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45933 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45934 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45935 manuals of the applications.
45938 \begin_layout Description
45940 \begin_inset space ~
45943 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45944 \begin_inset space ~
45948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45950 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45957 \begin_layout Description
45959 \begin_inset space ~
45962 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45963 \begin_inset space ~
45967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45969 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45976 \begin_layout Description
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45981 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45982 \begin_inset space ~
45986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45988 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45995 \begin_layout Description
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46011 command Command for the program
46013 Check\SpecialChar TeX
46016 that is described in the section
46018 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
46023 Additional Features
46028 \begin_layout Standard
46029 There are additionally the following options:
46032 \begin_layout Description
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46038 \begin_inset space ~
46042 \begin_inset space ~
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46051 \begin_inset space ~
46054 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46072 to separate folders.
46073 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
46075 \begin_inset Index idx
46078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46085 \begin_inset Index idx
46088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 \begin_layout Description
46099 \begin_inset space ~
46103 \begin_inset space ~
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46111 \begin_inset space ~
46115 \begin_inset space ~
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46122 changes Removes all manually set
46128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46131 \begin_inset space ~
46136 dialog when changing the document class.
46139 \begin_layout Section
46141 \begin_inset space ~
46145 \begin_inset Index idx
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 \begin_layout Subsection
46159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46161 name "subsec:Converters"
46166 \begin_inset Index idx
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46178 \begin_layout Standard
46179 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46180 from one format to another.
46181 You can modify converters or create new ones.
46182 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
46189 \begin_inset space ~
46194 field and press the
46199 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46203 \begin_inset space ~
46208 drop-down list, modify the
46212 field and press the
46219 \begin_layout Standard
46222 Converter File Cache
46228 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46230 Maximum Age (in days
46233 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46234 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46237 \begin_layout Standard
46238 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
46239 definition, is described in the section
46250 \begin_layout Subsection
46252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46254 name "sec:File-Formats"
46259 \begin_inset Index idx
46262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46269 \begin_inset Index idx
46272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46281 \begin_layout Standard
46282 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46292 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46295 \begin_layout Standard
46296 You can also define the
46298 Default output format
46300 that is used when you use
46302 View, Update, View Master Document
46306 Update Master Document
46312 menu or the toolbar.
46315 \begin_layout Standard
46316 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46327 \begin_layout Standard
46328 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46330 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46331 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46332 This is done by specifying a
46337 More about this is described in the section
46348 \begin_layout Chapter
46349 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46351 \begin_inset Index idx
46354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46363 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46370 \begin_layout Standard
46372 \begin_inset space ~
46376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46378 reference "tab:Units"
46382 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46383 and used in this documentation.
46386 \begin_layout Standard
46387 \begin_inset Float table
46393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46394 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46412 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 \begin_inset Tabular
46421 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
46422 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
46423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46424 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46575 scaled point (65536
46576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46636 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46691 % of original image width
46698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46905 \begin_layout Chapter
46907 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46909 name "chap:Credits"
46916 \begin_layout Standard
46917 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46918 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46921 \begin_layout Itemize
46924 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46927 \begin_layout Itemize
46933 \begin_layout Itemize
46939 \begin_layout Itemize
46945 \begin_layout Itemize
46951 \begin_layout Itemize
46957 \begin_layout Itemize
46963 \begin_layout Itemize
46969 \begin_layout Itemize
46972 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46975 \begin_layout Itemize
46981 \begin_layout Itemize
46987 \begin_layout Itemize
46993 \begin_layout Itemize
46999 \begin_layout Itemize
47005 \begin_layout Itemize
47011 \begin_layout Itemize
47017 \begin_layout Itemize
47023 \begin_layout Itemize
47024 The \SpecialChar LyX
47026 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47035 \begin_layout Standard
47036 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47039 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47046 \begin_layout Bibliography
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47048 LatexCommand bibitem
47054 The \SpecialChar LyX
47056 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47059 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47064 \begin_inset Newline newline
47068 \begin_inset Flex URL
47071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47073 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47081 \begin_layout Bibliography
47082 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47083 LatexCommand bibitem
47084 key "latexcompanion"
47088 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47090 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47091 Companion Second Edition.
47094 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47097 \begin_layout Bibliography
47098 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47099 LatexCommand bibitem
47104 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
47107 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47111 Addison-Wesley, 2003
47114 \begin_layout Bibliography
47115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47116 LatexCommand bibitem
47124 : A Document Preparation System.
47127 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
47130 \begin_layout Bibliography
47131 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47132 LatexCommand bibitem
47141 The \SpecialChar TeX
47145 Addison-Wesley, 1984
47148 \begin_layout Bibliography
47149 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47150 LatexCommand bibitem
47155 The \SpecialChar TeX
47157 \begin_inset Newline newline
47161 \begin_inset Flex URL
47164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47166 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
47174 \begin_layout Bibliography
47175 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47176 LatexCommand bibitem
47181 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47183 \begin_inset Newline newline
47187 \begin_inset Flex URL
47190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47192 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
47200 \begin_layout Bibliography
47201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47202 LatexCommand bibitem
47208 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47210 name "Documentation"
47211 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
47217 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47221 \begin_inset Newline newline
47225 \begin_inset Flex URL
47228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47230 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
47238 \begin_layout Bibliography
47239 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47240 LatexCommand bibitem
47246 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47248 name "Documentation"
47249 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47253 how to use the program
47255 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47259 \begin_inset Newline newline
47263 \begin_inset Flex URL
47266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47268 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47276 \begin_layout Bibliography
47277 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47278 LatexCommand bibitem
47284 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47286 name "Documentation"
47287 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47296 \begin_inset Newline newline
47300 \begin_inset Flex URL
47303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47305 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47313 \begin_layout Bibliography
47314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47315 LatexCommand bibitem
47321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47323 name "Documentation"
47324 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47333 \begin_inset Newline newline
47337 \begin_inset Flex URL
47340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47342 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47350 \begin_layout Bibliography
47351 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47352 LatexCommand bibitem
47358 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47360 name "Documentation"
47361 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47365 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47367 \begin_inset Newline newline
47371 \begin_inset Flex URL
47374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47376 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47384 \begin_layout Bibliography
47385 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47386 LatexCommand bibitem
47392 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47394 name "Documentation"
47395 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47399 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47405 \begin_inset Index idx
47408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47410 -packages ! caption
47416 \begin_inset Newline newline
47420 \begin_inset Flex URL
47423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47425 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47433 \begin_layout Bibliography
47434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47435 LatexCommand bibitem
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47443 name "Documentation"
47444 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47448 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47454 \begin_inset Index idx
47457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47459 -packages ! enumitem
47465 \begin_inset Newline newline
47469 \begin_inset Flex URL
47472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47474 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47482 \begin_layout Bibliography
47483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47484 LatexCommand bibitem
47490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47492 name "Documentation"
47493 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47497 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47503 \begin_inset Index idx
47506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47508 -packages ! fancyhdr
47514 \begin_inset Newline newline
47518 \begin_inset Flex URL
47521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47523 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47531 \begin_layout Bibliography
47532 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47533 LatexCommand bibitem
47539 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47541 name "Documentation"
47542 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47546 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47552 \begin_inset Index idx
47555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47557 -packages ! hyperref
47563 \begin_inset Newline newline
47567 \begin_inset Flex URL
47570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47572 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47580 \begin_layout Bibliography
47581 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47582 LatexCommand bibitem
47588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47590 name "Documentation"
47591 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47595 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47601 \begin_inset Index idx
47604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47606 -packages ! nomencl
47612 \begin_inset Newline newline
47616 \begin_inset Flex URL
47619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47621 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47629 \begin_layout Bibliography
47630 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47631 LatexCommand bibitem
47637 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47639 name "Documentation"
47640 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47644 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47650 \begin_inset Index idx
47653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47655 -packages ! prettyref
47661 \begin_inset Newline newline
47665 \begin_inset Flex URL
47668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47670 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47678 \begin_layout Bibliography
47679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47680 LatexCommand bibitem
47686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47688 name "Documentation"
47689 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47693 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47699 \begin_inset Index idx
47702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47704 -packages ! refstyle
47710 \begin_inset Newline newline
47714 \begin_inset Flex URL
47717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47719 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47727 \begin_layout Bibliography
47728 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47729 LatexCommand bibitem
47735 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47738 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47742 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47744 \begin_inset Newline newline
47748 \begin_inset Flex URL
47751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47753 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47761 \begin_layout Bibliography
47762 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47763 LatexCommand bibitem
47769 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47772 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47776 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47778 \begin_inset Newline newline
47782 \begin_inset Flex URL
47785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47787 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47795 \begin_layout Bibliography
47796 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47797 LatexCommand bibitem
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47806 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47810 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47811 for Cyrillic languages:
47812 \begin_inset Newline newline
47816 \begin_inset Flex URL
47819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47821 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47829 \begin_layout Bibliography
47830 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47831 LatexCommand bibitem
47837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47840 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47844 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47846 \begin_inset Newline newline
47850 \begin_inset Flex URL
47853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47855 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47863 \begin_layout Bibliography
47864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47865 LatexCommand bibitem
47871 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47874 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47878 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47880 \begin_inset Newline newline
47884 \begin_inset Flex URL
47887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47889 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47897 \begin_layout Bibliography
47898 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47899 LatexCommand bibitem
47905 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47908 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47912 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47914 \begin_inset Newline newline
47918 \begin_inset Flex URL
47921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47923 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47931 \begin_layout Bibliography
47932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47933 LatexCommand bibitem
47939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47942 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47946 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47948 \begin_inset Newline newline
47952 \begin_inset Flex URL
47955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47957 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47965 \begin_layout Bibliography
47966 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47967 LatexCommand bibitem
47973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47976 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47980 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47982 \begin_inset Newline newline
47986 \begin_inset Flex URL
47989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47991 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47999 \begin_layout Bibliography
48000 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48001 LatexCommand bibitem
48007 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48010 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48014 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48016 \begin_inset Newline newline
48020 \begin_inset Flex URL
48023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48025 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48033 \begin_layout Bibliography
48034 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48035 LatexCommand bibitem
48041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48044 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48048 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48050 \begin_inset Newline newline
48054 \begin_inset Flex URL
48057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48059 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
48067 \begin_layout Bibliography
48068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48069 LatexCommand bibitem
48075 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48078 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
48082 about new features in
48088 \begin_inset Newline newline
48092 \begin_inset Flex URL
48095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48097 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
48105 \begin_layout Standard
48106 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48140 \begin_inset Note Note
48143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48150 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
48151 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
48152 bibliography is the second one:
48160 \begin_layout Standard
48161 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
48162 LatexCommand bibtex
48163 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
48164 options "biblio/alphadin"
48171 \begin_layout Standard
48172 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48176 \begin_layout Standard
48177 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
48178 LatexCommand printnomenclature
48184 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
48185 LatexCommand printindex